JP7180732B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine, for example, as a typical example of a game machine ( see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-33792 (see FIG. 5)

However, conventional gaming machines have problems .

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game .

In order to achieve these objects, the present invention has the following configuration.
That is, the invention according to claim 1 is
A gaming machine that variably displays identification information due to the establishment of a starting condition, and shifts to a specific game state advantageous to a player when the variably displayed result becomes a predetermined specific display mode,
information output means for outputting auditory information that is audibly recognizable according to the progress of the game;
information output control means for controlling output of information by the information output means;
and an operation means for receiving an operation by a player,
The information output control means is
Specific information output control for controlling the output of specific auditory information having a plurality of levels at which the first recognizable time point can differ depending on the player within the specific information effect period during the variable display of the identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. have the means to
In the specific information rendering period, a validity period is set during which the operation of the operating means is valid while the specific auditory information is being output,
grasping means for grasping the level of the specific auditory information being output based on the operation of the operating means during the valid period;
a display control means for causing a display means to display information suggesting the level based on the grasped level ;
The specific auditory information can be output in stages from specific auditory information that is difficult for the player to recognize to specific auditory information that is easy for the player to recognize.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game .

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS It is a front view of the pachinko machine of Example 1 of this invention. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. 5 is a main part of the block diagram shown in FIG. 4; FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display content of a 3rd pattern display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline|summary of the various counters used for game control. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing by a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by a main controller; It is a flowchart which shows a 1st design variation process. It is a flow chart which shows fluctuation start processing. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart which shows starting prize-winning processing. 4 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing; It is a flow chart which shows the main processing by a payout control device. It is a flow chart which shows payout control processing. It is a flow chart which shows prize ball control processing. It is a flow chart which shows ball rental control processing. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing by a sub-controller; 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by a sub-controller; It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring / production|presentation processing by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation button input monitoring / production|presentation process by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation execution management process by a sub-control apparatus. 9 is a flowchart showing specific sound listening determination processing by a sub-controller; 8 is a flowchart showing specific sound output period setting processing by a sub-control device; It is a flowchart which shows the opening-and-closing mode (jackpot) display setting process by a sub-control device. 9 is a flowchart showing a variable display mode setting process by a sub-controller; 9 is a flowchart showing a one-shot notification sound determination process by a sub control device; (a) and (b) are diagrams showing a one-shot notification sound determination table stored by a sub-controller. It is a flow chart which shows the one-shot announcement effect processing by the sub-control device. (a) is a flow chart showing normal processing of the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing switching processing such as a display mode by the display control device. (a) is a flowchart showing normal voice output processing, and (b) is a flowchart showing specific sound/one-shot notification sound output processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of a specific sound output effect and a one-shot notification effect. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the main part of the electrical configuration of the second embodiment; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing specific sound output period setting processing by the sub-control device of the second embodiment; 10 is a flowchart showing switching processing of display modes and the like by the display control device of the second embodiment; It is a figure for demonstrating reach promotion production|presentation. FIG. 11 is a main part of a block part showing an electrical configuration of Example 3; FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing a starting winning process according to the third embodiment; It is a flow chart which shows prefetch lottery processing. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing specific sound output period setting processing according to the third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing variable display mode setting processing according to the third embodiment; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the look-ahead effect. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing the essential parts of the electrical configuration of Example 4; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a variable display mode setting process by a sub-controller according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing specific sound output period setting processing by a sub-controller according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating step-up notice production. FIG. 11 is a front view of a game board of Example 5; FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the essential parts of electrical connections in Example 5; It is a diagram for explaining the number-of-opens suggesting effect and the advantageous game state suggesting effect. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram showing an outline of a game system of a pachinko machine of Example 6; 4 is a flowchart showing menu display processing by a sub control device; It is a flow chart which shows password input processing by a sub control device. 10 is a flowchart showing game end code display processing by a sub-control device; This is a menu screen for a game linked to a game machine. It is a flow chart which shows game machine interlocking game server processing. Fig. 11 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine of Example 7; It is a figure explaining the game area of a game board. It is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls in the first right game area. It is an explanatory view showing the flow of game balls in the second right game area. FIG. 21 is a front view of a game board of the pachinko machine of Example 8; It is a figure explaining the flow of the game ball in the 2nd right side game area of Example 8. FIG. FIG. 21 is a front view of a game board of the pachinko machine of Example 9; It is a diagram for explaining the flow of game balls in the second right game area. FIG. 20 is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine of Example 10; FIG. 20 is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine of Example 11; It is a figure explaining the board surface structure of the game board in the state attached to the inner frame which concerns on a modification. (a) to (d) are examples of notification images indicating the first right game area or the second right game area.

Various embodiments of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings.

Here, the meanings of terms used in the following description will be explained.
"Specific game state" refers to a game state in which a predetermined game value is given to a player when the result of the lottery based on the fulfillment of the starting condition is a specific result. In the specific game state, a specific game that closes the specific ball entrance on the condition that either a predetermined time elapses after the specific ball entrance is opened or a predetermined number of game balls enter is performed a predetermined number of times. will be The specific game state may also be called a "special game state".
The "specific result" may be a jackpot winning result, or may be a so-called small prize winning, although the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss. Winning a jackpot may be reported to the player with a specific stop pattern in which three patterns of the same type are arranged, or by a specific stop pattern in which patterns of different types are arranged in a predetermined manner. Alternatively, the player may be notified by stopping a specific image other than the pattern. Winning a small prize may be notified to the player with a specific stop pattern in which different kinds of patterns are arranged in a predetermined manner, or may be notified to the player by stopping a specific image other than the patterns. . The specific game state based on the jackpot winning may be called a jackpot game state. A specific game state based on a small hit winning may be called a small hit game state.
"Predetermined game value" may be obtained during the execution of the specific game, may be obtained during the game for a specific period after the end of the specific game, or may be obtained during the execution of the specific game and the end of the specific game. In some cases, it can be obtained both with a later specified period. The game value obtained during execution of the specific game is, for example, the payout of game media for the ball entering the specific ball entrance. The game value obtained in a specific period after the end of the specific game is a high probability state ( Random state), and the probability that the result of the lottery based on the establishment of the starting condition (normal pattern starting condition) will be a specific result (normal pattern) is high probability (support state), and before the execution of the specific game A specific video or image that was not seen in the normal game state is displayed, or a game mode (a mode in which a specific video or image is displayed) before or after a specific game is changed to a different game mode (specific video or image). For example, an effect that shifts to a mode in which a video or image different from the image is displayed) is executed. A specific game state in which a variable probability state occurs as a game value may be called a specific game state with variable probability.
"Specific game", whether in the jackpot game state or the small win game state, either a predetermined time has passed since the specific ball entrance is opened or a predetermined number of game balls are entered. In particular, in the case of a jackpot game state, either a predetermined time elapses after the specific ball entrance is opened or a predetermined number of game balls enter. is called one round, and a game in which the round game is executed a predetermined number of times is sometimes called a jackpot round game.
In the "jackpot round game", the number of rounds and the opening/closing pattern of the specific ball entrance differ depending on the type of jackpot winning. As for the number of rounds, for example, a short round number of about 1 to 3 rounds, an intermediate round number of about 7 to 9 rounds, and a long round number of about 14 to 16 rounds are set. The opening and closing pattern may be a constant pattern regardless of the length of the number of rounds, may be a different pattern depending on the length of the number of rounds, or may be a different pattern for the same number of rounds. .
In the "specific game state with probability variation", a jackpot round game with a short number of rounds is adopted, and an opening and closing pattern that opens and closes a specific ball entrance in a short time that makes it difficult for the player to notice the occurrence of a jackpot round game. be. As a result, the player does not see the notification of winning the jackpot, or the notification of winning the jackpot is difficult for the player to recognize and notification to stop a specific image other than the pattern), and if the player is not aware of winning the jackpot, start and end the jackpot round game while the player is not aware of it, and the variable state is It can appear to occur suddenly.
In the "small hit gaming state", the notification is performed in the same manner as "a mode in which the notification of the jackpot winning is difficult for the player to notice" when the above-described specific game state with probability variation is generated, and the above-mentioned specific game with probability variation An opening and closing pattern with a short time period may be adopted as well as the state. As a result, even if the player knows the existence of ``a mode in which the notification of the winning of the jackpot is difficult for the player to notice'', it is possible to determine whether it causes the specific game state with probability variation or remains in the small win game state. can be difficult to distinguish. It should be noted that it is possible for a player familiar with the game to determine whether it is a specific game state with variable probability or a small winning game state by the lighting mode of the display lamp indicating the type of jackpot winning, but it is difficult for general players. .

Example 1 is an example of the present invention and an invention described in (A system) described later.
A pachinko machine of Example 1 will be described in detail based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 of Embodiment 1 of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. FIG. 5 shows the main part of the block diagram shown in FIG. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the third pattern display device 42. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and is fixed to a game island of a game hall (hall), and one side of the outer frame 11 (for example, the front An inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to an outer frame 11 with the left side as viewed from the front) serving as an opening/closing axis J1, and an inner frame having one side of the inner frame 12 (for example, the left side as viewed from the front) having an opening/closing axis J2. 12 is provided with a front frame set 14 that can be freely opened and closed.

The outer frame 11 is made of wooden plate members and is generally rectangular in a front view, and each plate member is assembled with a detachable fastener such as a machine screw. In this embodiment, for example, the outer frame 11 has an outer dimension in the vertical direction of 809 mm (inner dimension of 771 mm) and an outer dimension in the horizontal direction of 518 mm (inner dimension of 480 mm). Note that the outer frame 11 may be made of resin, light metal such as aluminum, or the like.

The inner frame 12 is roughly divided into a resin base 12a as a main member forming its outer shape, and a game board 30 attached to the resin base 12a. In addition, as shown in FIG. 1, the inner frame 12 has a front frame set 14 that can be opened to one side on the front side of the resin base 12a.

Here, the front frame set 14 will be described in a little more detail.

As shown in FIG. 1, the front frame set 14, when viewed from the front, has a lower plate portion 13 positioned at the bottom, an upper plate portion 21 positioned above the lower plate portion 13, and this upper plate portion. 21 and a glass frame portion 23 positioned above the glass frame portion 21 .

By attaching the lower plate portion 13, the upper plate portion 21, and the glass frame portion 23 to respective portions on the front side of a base plate (not shown) which is a resin-molded component of the front frame set 14, the front frame set 14 is configured.

As shown in FIG. 1, the lower tray part 13 is a part in which parts forming the lower tray 15 and parts surrounding the parts are integrated. , and are fixed to the lowermost portion of the base plate (not shown) in a front view by fasteners such as screws. The lower plate portion 13 has a lower plate 15 and a ball removing lever 17 on its front side.

As shown in FIG. 1, the lower plate 15 as a ball receiving plate is provided on the left side of the large three-dimensional character portion 25 when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and is about half the width of the front frame set 14. Game balls discharged from the discharge port 16 can be stored in the lower tray 15. - 特許庁The ball extraction lever 17 is for extracting (discharging) game balls from the lower tray 15. By moving the ball extraction lever 17 to the left in FIG. For example, a circular discharge portion formed in a substantially central portion) is opened, and the game balls stored in the lower tray 15 can be discharged downward to the outside through the circular discharge portion opened in the bottom surface of the lower tray 15.

As shown in FIG. 1, the upper plate portion 21 is a component in which a component forming the upper plate 19 and a component surrounding the component are integrated. ), it is fixed to the lower part of the base plate (not shown) by fasteners such as screws, and has an upper plate 19 as a receiving plate for game balls. Here, the upper plate 19 is a ball receiver for temporarily storing game balls and leading them out toward the shooting device 229 while aligning them in a line.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1, the upper plate portion 21 has various operation buttons operated by the player on its upper surface. These operation buttons include a performance button 80 provided on the upper surface of the top plate portion 21 near the ball storage space of the top plate 19, and a portion nearer to the performance button 80 (which is closer to the player than the performance button 80). A top selection button 71, a bottom selection button 72, a left selection button 73, and a right selection button 74 (collectively, selection buttons 71 to 74) are arranged side by side. Note that the effect button 80 corresponds to the operating means of the present invention. The operating means may be operating means other than the push button type, such as a lever type or a touch sensor type.

As shown in FIG. 1, the glass frame portion 23 includes a window portion 101 formed on the upper side of the upper plate portion 21 and various electrical decoration portions (first electrical decoration portion 300) provided around the window portion 101. , a second illumination portion 302 and a third illumination portion 304) and sound output portions 24a and 24b. The sound output unit 24a includes a speaker for outputting normal sound in a frequency band that is output as a normal game progresses. As will be described later, the sound output unit 24b outputs a specific sound having a frequency band of a predetermined height (for example, 19 kHz) that can be heard only by some players, or a frequency band of a lower height (17 kHz, 15 kHz). is also output. Therefore, the sound output unit 24b includes a speaker capable of outputting even a high frequency band having such a specific sound. Note that the sound output units 24a and 24b correspond to the sound output means of the present invention.

As shown in FIG. 1, the sound output unit 24 is provided on the left and right sides of the upper part of the front frame set 14 when viewed from the front, and outputs sound from speakers provided inside or on the back of the front frame set 14. It is formed with a plurality of output ports for Only a part of this output port is shown in FIG. 1, and the entire illustration is omitted.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 1, the front frame set 14 includes a game area 30a (see FIG. 3) of the game board 30 at the center of the glass frame 23 located above the upper tray 21. A substantially oblong elliptical window 101 is formed so that most of it can be visually recognized from the outside. Specifically, the window portion 101 has a substantially vertically oblong shape and a hollow center (opening portion 101a). is attached to the back side of the front frame set 14 . This glass unit has a double glass structure in which two glass plates 137 are arranged close to each other in the front-rear direction. It should be noted that the substantially central portion of the window portion 101 may be formed in a straight line, and the glass plate 137 may be made to conform to that shape. Further, the glass plate 137 is not limited to glass, and any material may be used as long as it is a transparent plate having a predetermined strength.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 1, the glass frame portion 23 includes a first electrical decoration portion 300, a second electrical decoration portion 302, and a third electrical decoration portion 304 around the window portion 101. As shown in FIG. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 1, the front frame set 14 has a first decorative part 300 (left decorative part ) is placed around the window 101 on the right side, and a second illumination part 302 (right side illumination part) containing an LED or the like is placed around the window part 101. A decorative portion 304 (upper decorative portion) is provided. These illumination parts play a role of increasing the effect during the game by changing the light emission mode such as lighting and blinking according to the change of the game state such as when a big win or a predetermined reach.

In the pachinko machine 10, the first decorative part 300, the second decorative part 302 and the third decorative part 304 function as jackpot lamps, and notify that the jackpot is in progress by lighting or flashing at the time of the jackpot. do. In addition, the first illumination part 300 and the second illumination part 302 of the pachinko machine 10 are provided with a prize ball lamp 105 that lights up during prize ball payout and an error display lamp 106 that lights up when a predetermined error occurs. there is

In addition, a small window 107 made of transparent resin is provided on the periphery of the window portion 101 at a lower right position so that the surface of the inner frame 12 and the surface of the game board 30 can be partially viewed. Since a predetermined portion of the small window 107 is flat, a certificate stamp or the like attached to the lower right corner of the game board 30 can be read by a machine through the flat portion of the small window 107 .

A ball lending operation unit 120 is arranged on the lower right side of the window part 101, and a ball lending button 121 and a return button 122 are provided in the ball lending operation unit 120. - 特許庁When the ball lending operation unit 120 is operated with bills or cards (for example, prepaid cards) inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Game balls are lent out. The ball lending button 121 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the upper tray 19 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 120 may be further provided with a frequency display unit (not shown). This frequency display unit (not shown) displays the balance information of the card or the like. The ball lending operation unit 120 is not required in a pachinko machine in which game balls are directly lent to the upper tray from a ball lending device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine. Therefore, a decorative sticker or the like is attached to the installation portion of the ball rental operation unit 120. - 特許庁As a result, the pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can share the ball rental operation unit.

Next, the configuration of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 30 includes a square wooden (for example, plywood) game board 30b in a front view with both left corners removed. The outer portions of the rails 51 and 52 that connect the rails 51 and 52 are attached in contact with the back side of the resin base 12a of the inner frame 12 . The game area 30a, which is a substantially central portion on the front side of the game board 30, is formed through the glass plate 137 of the substantially elliptical base plate (not shown) of the front frame set 14 shown in FIG. It is visible from the front outside of frame set 14 .

In addition, the game board 30 includes a general winning port 31, a variable winning device 32, a starting winning device 33 (for example, an operating chucker), a third starting port 34 (hereinafter referred to as a through gate 34), and a variable display device unit 35. . These general winning port 31, variable winning device 32, starting winning device 33, through gate 34, and variable display device unit 35 are arranged in respective through-holes formed by router processing in the game board 30, and are used to play games. It is attached from the front side of the board 30 with wood screws or the like.

The starting winning device 33 is composed of a single winning device in which a first starting port 33a (for example, an operation chucker) and a second starting port 33b (for example, an operation chucker) are vertically arranged in order from the top. there is An operation port switch (passage detection switch) (not shown) for the first starting port 33a is provided in the first starting port 33a on the upper side. It is detected by the actuating port switch for the first starting port 33a. In addition, the second starting port 33b on the lower side is provided with an operation port switch (passage detection switch) (not shown) for the second starting port 33b. It is detected by the actuating port switch for the second starting port 33b. In either case of the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33a on the upper side or the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 33b on the lower side, it is a start winning. There is no change, and those incoming balls can be detected individually.

In addition, the ball entering the general winning hole 31 is detected by a detection switch (a winning hole switch not shown), and the ball entering the variable winning device 32 is detected by a detection switch (count switch not shown). A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the upper tray 19 (or the lower tray 15) based on the output of the detection switch.

For example, when the ball enters the first starting port 33a and the second starting port 33b, three prize balls are paid out. In addition, when the ball enters the general winning hole 31 and the variable winning device 32, 10 winning balls are paid out. Note that the number of these prize balls is arbitrary and may be various numbers.

A game ball enters the through gate 34 and is detected by a detection switch (passage detection switch, not shown). not.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36, and game balls that have not entered various prize-winning devices pass through the out port 36 to a ball discharge path (not shown). be guided in the direction A large number of nails 39 are planted on the game board 30 in order to appropriately distribute and adjust the falling direction of game balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills 37 are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the variable display device unit 35 variably displays a first pattern (for example, a special pattern) as identification information, triggered by winning the first starting port 33a and the second starting port 33b. A first symbol display device 40, a second symbol display device 41 that variably displays a second symbol (for example, a normal symbol) triggered by passing through the through gate 34, a first starting port 33a and a second starting port 33b. A third pattern display device 42 is provided for variably displaying a third pattern (for example, a decorative pattern) triggered by winning a prize. The third pattern display device 42 corresponds to display means of the present invention. The display means is a display means other than the third pattern display device 42, for example, a display device dedicated to display effects, or a light-transmissive resin panel such as an acrylic panel provided in place of the glass plate 137 or provided together with the glass plate 137 and capable of displaying an image. It may be a plate.

As shown in FIG. 3, the first pattern display device 40 is, for example, a first segment display that is a segment display (for example, a 7-segment LED display with a decimal point) in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. It has a portion 40a. The first segment display portion 40a performs variable light emission or the like based on the ball entering the first starting port 33a or the second starting port 33b. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the first symbol display device 40 is provided with a pending lamp 40c that indicates the pending number of variable display in the first segment display section 40a.

The first segment display unit 40a randomly or sequentially changes the light emission of each segment light-emitting unit based on the ball entering the first starting port 33a or the second starting port 33b, thereby performing a variable display of the first symbol. A state (light emission variation mode of each segment light emitting portion in this embodiment) is generated, and when the light emission variation is stopped, for example, if the first symbol (for example, numbers, letters, etc.) is displayed by light emission, it means a probability variable jackpot (specific win). However, when the second symbol (e.g., numbers and letters) is luminous, it means a latent probability variable jackpot (latent specific hit), and when the third symbol (e.g., numbers, letters, etc.) is luminous, it means a normal jackpot (non-specific hit). If the fourth symbol (for example, a number or a letter) is illuminated, it means a failure. It should be noted that the display of the first to fourth symbols by the first segment display section 40a does not make sense even if a general player sees it. It is a display that does not know (or is difficult to understand) whether it indicates a latent probability variable jackpot, a normal jackpot or a miss.

When the variable winning jackpot (specific win), latent variable jackpot (latent specific hit), or normal jackpot (non-specific hit) occurs, the variable winning device 32 enters a specific game state (for example, jackpot state) described later.

As the first pattern display device 40, a single or a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light of at least two colors may be adopted. Specifically, taking as an example a case where two LEDs capable of emitting light in red and blue are adopted as the first pattern display device 40, by alternately changing the emission color of each LED, the first pattern display device 40 A variable display state of the pattern (light emission color mode of each LED) is generated, for example, if both LEDs stop in a red light emitting state, a probability variable jackpot (specific win) is indicated, one LED stops in a red light emitting state and the other When the LEDs are turned off, it indicates a latent probability variable jackpot (latent specific hit), when both LEDs stop in a blue light emitting state, it indicates a normal jackpot (non-specific hit), and when both LEDs stop in a different color light emitting state, it is out is shown. Further, at least one of the first segment display portion 40a and the holding lamp 40c constituting the first pattern display device 40 may be replaced by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. , or may be configured to be displayed on the display screen 42a of the third pattern display device 42 in particular. In addition, as the pattern displayed on the first pattern display device 40, there are a structure in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a structure in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a structure in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a structure in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed. A configuration in which colors are displayed may be considered.

The second pattern display device 41 includes a display portion 41a for the second pattern on which, for example, "○" is drawn, a display portion 41b for which the second pattern is drawn, for example, "X", and a holding lamp 41c. Each time the game ball passes through the through gate 34, for example, the display pattern (normal pattern) by the display units 41a and 41b fluctuates, and when the fluctuation display stops at a predetermined pattern, the second start on the lower side The opening 33b is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time. The number of times the game ball passes through the through gate 34 is reserved up to four times, and the number of times of reservation is displayed by the reservation lamp 41c. The display units 41a and 41b have LEDs (light-emitting diodes) inside thereof, and are configured to perform variable display by switching the light emission of these LEDs (or the lighting of lamps). Also, at least one of the second pattern display device 41 and the holding lamp 41c may be configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. It may be configured to be displayed on the display screen 42 a of the third symbol display device 42 .

In the third symbol display device 42, the first symbol display device 40 performs a variable display and a predetermined display (stop display) of the first symbol based on the winning of the first starting port 33a and the second starting port 33b. When the third symbol is displayed, the variable display and the predetermined display (stop display) of the third symbol are performed accordingly. In addition, in the third symbol display device 42, not only the display effect triggered by the winning of the first starting port 33a or the second starting port 33b, but also the display during the specific game state that shifts after the jackpot is won. There will be performances, etc.

The third pattern display device 42 is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal display device, and display contents are controlled by a display control device 45, which will be described later. For example, as shown in FIG. 6, the third pattern display device 42 displays three decorative pattern rows L, M and R on the left, middle and right. Each of the decorative pattern rows L, M, and R is composed of a plurality of decorative patterns, and these decorative patterns are variably displayed on the third pattern display device 42 so as to be scrolled for each of the decorative pattern rows L, M, and R. be. In this embodiment, the third pattern display device 42 (liquid crystal display device) is provided with, for example, a large 11-inch liquid crystal display. The variable display device unit 35 is provided with a center frame 47 in front of the third pattern display device 42 so as to substantially surround the display screen 42a of the third pattern display device 42 when viewed from the front. In this embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the third pattern display device 42, but other types of image display devices (for example, PDP: plasma display panel, EL: electroluminescence display, organic EL, etc.) may be adopted.

The variable winning device 32 shown in FIG. 3 is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot win (or may be in a closed state in which it is difficult to win). is repeatedly actuated to the closed state of the In this way, the state in which the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly operated between the open state and the normal closed state at the time of a big win is called a specific game state (for example, a big win state), and the variable winning device 32 is called a special game state (for example, a jackpot state). Since the ball enters (wins a prize) and a large number of game balls are paid out in response to the winning, the game state is advantageous for the player. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the number of game balls inserted (the number of game balls fired into the game area 30a by the launcher 229) is greater than the number of game balls paid out (general prize winning opening 31, variable A normal game state (game ball consumption state) larger than the number of prize balls paid out based on the game balls entering the winning device 32, the first start port 33a, the second start port 33b, etc., and a game ball prize The state can be changed to a specific game state (for example, a jackpot state) in which the number of put-out balls is larger than the number of inserted game balls.

More specifically, when the game ball wins the first starting port 33a or the second starting port 33b, the first segment display portion 40a of the first symbol display device 40 is displayed in a variable manner, and the first segment after the variation stops. A specific game state occurs when the display of the display unit 40a stops at a preset symbol. For example, when the first symbol is statically displayed, it means that the specific gaming state of the probability variable jackpot (specific win) is won, and when the second symbol is statically displayed, the latent variable probability jackpot (latent specific win). If the 3rd symbol is stopped and displayed, it means that you have won a special game state with a normal jackpot (non-specific win), and if the 4th symbol is stopped It means that you are out (that you have lost the specific game state).

Then, in the case of occurrence of the specific game state, the variable winning device 32 is configured such that the big winning opening 32a is in a predetermined open state, and the game ball is easily won (big hit state). Specifically, the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 rounds), with the lapse of a predetermined time or the winning of a predetermined number of prizes in the open state as one round. In addition, the number of times the game ball passes through the first starting port 33a and the second starting port 33b is suspended up to four times, and the number of suspensions is the suspension lamps 40c1, 40c2, 40c3, 40c4 (generally referred to as suspension lamps 40c). The suspension lamps 40c are lit in order of 40c1, 40c2, 40c3, and 40c4. The suspension lamp 40c may be configured such that a suspension display or the like is performed on a portion of the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42, or the like.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, the game board 30 is provided with two rails 51 and 52 for guiding the game balls shot from the shooting device 229 (see FIG. 2) to the upper part of the game board 30. A game ball shot with the rotating operation of the game ball shooting handle 18 is guided to a predetermined game area 30a through a ball guide passage 49 of the two rails 51 and 52, which will be described later. The two rails 51 and 52 are elongated stainless metal belt-like members, and are attached to the game board 30 in a double inner and outer configuration. The inner rail 51 is formed in a shape of a substantially vertical ellipse, as seen from the front view of the game board 30, excluding a portion from the oblique upper left to the oblique lower right clockwise. The outer rail 52 is formed so that a part (mainly the left side) faces the inner rail 51 . In this case, the guide rail is constituted by the inner rail 51 and the outer rail 52, and the ball guide passage 49 is formed by the portion (on the left side) where the rails 51 and 52 are parallel to each other with a predetermined interval therebetween. . The ball guide passage 49 is formed in a groove shape having a contact surface with the game board 30, that is, in a groove shape with an open front side.

A return ball prevention member 53 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 51 (upper left portion in FIG. 3). This prevents the game ball once guided from the ball guide passage 49 between the inner rail 51 and the outer rail 52 to the upper part of the game board 30 from returning to the ball guide passage 49 again. Also, in the state where the game board 30 is attached to the inner frame 12, the position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the game ball on the outer rail 52 (the upper right part of FIG. 3: the portion corresponding to the tip of the outer rail 52). , the return rubber 54 is located. Therefore, a game ball shot with a force greater than or equal to a predetermined amount hits the return rubber 54 and is bounced back. Since the outer rail 52 is made of a long stainless steel metal band, it is possible to make flight of the game ball smoother, that is, to reduce the frictional resistance of the game ball. In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, from the tip of the outer rail 52 (upper right in FIG. 3) to the right tip of the inner rail 51 (lower right in FIG. 3) is the game area of the first symbol display device 40. A wall portion 56 on the side of 30a and a wall portion 55 formed in the inner frame 12 (indicated by broken lines in FIG. 3) are positioned to partition the game area 30a.

As shown in FIG. 3, the lower right corner of the game board 30 is a space for attaching a seal SL (which may be a plate) such as a certificate stamp (for example, a manufacturing number is written). By attaching a sticker SL such as a certificate stamp to the lower right corner of the game board 30, the game board 30 and the certificate stamp can be made unique.

Next, the game area 30a of the game board 30 will be described. The game area 30a is, as shown in FIG. The game area 30a that is partitioned on the board surface is configured to be large.

In this embodiment, the game area 30a is defined by the inner rail 51 and the outer rail 52 when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, except for the guide rail area that is the parallel portion of the inner and outer rails 51 and 52. area. Therefore, since the play area 30a does not include the guide rail portion, the left limit position of the game area 30a is specified by the inner rail 51 instead of the outer rail 52.例文帳に追加Also, the right side limit position of the game area 30a is specified by the wall portion 55 (part of the inner frame 12). In addition, the inner rail 51 specifies the lower limit position of the game area 30a. Also, the upper limit position of the game area 30a is specified by the outer rail 52. As shown in FIG.

Although detailed drawings are not disclosed, game balls are supplied one by one to the shooting device 229 from a ball outlet (not shown) of the front frame set 14 (a ball outlet leading from the most downstream part of the upper tray 19). .

Next, the configuration of the rear surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 (actually, the back surface of the inner frame 12 and the game board 30) has various control boards arranged vertically and horizontally, and predetermined control boards are stacked one on top of the other ( For example, the payout control board 311a of FIG. 4, which will be described later, is on the front side in a rear view, and the power control board of the power supply device 313 and the launch control board of the launch control device 312 are located on the back side of the payout control board 311a). Further, a game ball supply device (payout mechanism 352) for supplying game balls, a resin protective cover 353, and the like are attached. In this embodiment, various control boards are mounted on a plurality (three) of mounting bases 230 to 232 shown in FIG. It is attached to the back surface of the game board 30. - 特許庁Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2, the main control device 261 is mounted on the mounting base 230, the sub-control device 262 is mounted on the mounting base 232 and each unitized, the payout control device 311, the launch control device 312 and a power supply device 313 are mounted on a mounting base 231 to form a unit.

2, various parts (a tank 355, a tank rail 356, a case rail 357, a payout device 358, and a power switch board 382, which will be described later) are reverse L when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10. The dispensing mechanism part 352 and the protective cover 353 are also integrated as one unit, and this unit is sometimes referred to as a back pack. It is called a pack unit 203”.

The back pack unit 203 is configured so that it can be attached and detached in unit units without using any tools or the like. It is configured so that it can be opened and closed. This is also a device for making it possible to easily confirm hidden structures and the like even when the back pack unit 203 and other structures are stacked one on top of the other.

In addition, on the back surface of the game board 30, a prize winning detection mechanism for detecting the passage of game balls such as various prize winning ports is provided. Specifically, a winning slot switch (not shown) is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning slot 31 on the front side of the game board 30, and a count switch (not shown) is provided for the variable winning device 32. The count switch is a switch for counting winning balls. At positions corresponding to the first starting port 33a and the second starting port 33b, there is an operating port switch (not shown) for the first starting port 33a and an operating port switch (not shown) for the second starting port 33b. (omitted) (not shown) are provided, respectively, and the entrance of the game ball to the first start port 33a and the second start port 33b is detected by each operation port switch. A gate switch is provided at a position corresponding to the through gate 34, and passage of a game ball to the through gate 34 is detected by the gate switch.

The winning slot switch (not shown) of the general winning slot 31 and the gate switch of the through gate 34 are connected to a board connection board (not shown) through electrical wiring (not shown). is connected to the main control board 261a (see FIG. 4). Also, the count switch of the variable winning device 32 is connected to a large winning opening relay terminal board (not shown), which is also connected to the main control board 261a. On the other hand, each operating port switch of the first starting port 33a and the second starting port 33b is directly connected to the main control board 261a without the intermediate board.

Although not shown in the drawings, the variable winning device 32 is provided with a large winning opening solenoid for opening the large winning opening 32a, and the second start opening 33b on the lower side is provided for opening the electric accessory. actuating port solenoid is provided.

The detection results respectively detected by the winning detection mechanism are taken into a main control board 261a in the main controller 261, which will be described later, and the main control board 261a issues a payout command (game ball payout number) is transmitted to the payout control board 311a. Then, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out according to the output of the payout control board 311a.

As shown in FIG. 2, the main controller 261 is mounted on the mounting base 230 on the lower side of the pachinko machine 10 when viewed from the rear, and the sub-controller 262 is mounted on the mounting base 232 on the upper side of the pachinko machine 10 when viewed from the rear. It is Here, as shown in FIG. 4, the main control unit 261 includes a CPU 501 for main control, a ROM 502 storing game programs, a RAM 503 storing necessary data according to the progress of the game, and various devices. Main control including an input/output port 505 for communication, a random number generator (not shown) used for various lotteries, and a clock pulse generator circuit (not shown) used for time counting and synchronization. The main control board 261a is housed in a board box 263 (encapsulating means) made of a transparent resin material or the like. The board box 263 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. These box base and box cover are unopenably connected by a sealing unit 261c, whereby the board box 263 is sealed.

In addition, the sub-controller 262 includes, for example, a CPU 551 that controls voice and lamp display and controls the display control device 45 in accordance with instructions from a main control board 261a in the main controller 261, a ROM 552, a RAM 553, a bus line 554 and It has a sub-control board 262a including an input/output port 555 and the like, and this sub-control board 262a is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material or the like. Power supplied from a power supply board, which will be described later, is output to the display control device 45 via the sub-controller 262 . The sub control device 262 corresponds to the audio output control means of the present invention.

As shown in FIG. 5, the sub-control device 262 stores various flags and counters, which will be described later in detail, in the storage area of the RAM 553, that is, 30×n game times (n: integer) from the power-on of the pachinko machine 10). based on the arrival of the first specific sound (19 kHz) having a frequency band of a predetermined height that only some players can hear within the specific sound production period during the variable display of the third pattern, and First, second, and third specific sound output flags for controlling output of the second specific sound (17 kHz) and the third specific sound (15 kHz) having a frequency band lower than the sound output unit 24 , a counter for counting the elapsed time of the specific sound effect period, and an audible frequency band (first specific sound: 19 kHz, second Specific sound: 17 kHz, third specific sound: 15 kHz), and based on the fact that the audible frequency band is grasped, the first, third specific sound according to the audible frequency band 1st, 2nd, and 3rd specific sound listening display flags for displaying 2nd and 3rd specific sound listening images on the 3rd pattern display device 42, and when the fluctuation display result becomes a jackpot display mode, the 1st, 2nd , 1st, 2nd, 1st, 2nd to output the 1st, 2nd and 3rd one-shot notification sounds of height (19 kHz, 17 kHz, 15 kHz) corresponding to the height of the audible frequency band grasped by the third specific sound listening flag , the third one-shot notification sound flag, and so on.

As shown in FIG. 2 , a payout control device 311 , a launch control device 312 , a power supply device 313 and a card unit connection board 314 are mounted on the mount 231 . The payout control device 311 has a CPU that forms the center of control, and a control board that includes ROM, RAM, various ports, and the like. Fire control device 312 also includes a fire control board. Also, the power supply device 313 has a power control board. A payout control board 311a of the payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls. In addition, the shooting control board of the shooting control device 312 controls the shooting device 229 (see FIG. 4) according to the operation of the game ball shooting handle 18 by the player, and the power supply board of the power supply device 313 controls various control devices. A required predetermined power supply voltage is generated and output. The shooting device 229 of this embodiment employs a solenoid-type shooting component that strikes and shoots a game ball with a shooting mallet (not shown) that can move back and forth according to energization/de-energization of a shooting solenoid (not shown). In addition, as the launching device 229 other than that, there are various types such as a mechanical launching part that shoots the game ball by striking it with a shooting punch that operates according to the drive of the launching motor, and an electromagnetic launching part that shoots the game ball by generating an electromagnetic field. type may be adopted. The card unit connection board 314 is electrically connected to the ball lending operation section 120 (see FIG. 1) on the front of the pachinko machine and a card unit (not shown), takes in a player's ball lending operation command, and outputs it to the payout control device 311. is output to Note that the card unit connection board 314 is unnecessary in a cash machine in which game balls are directly lent to the upper tray 19 from a ball lending device or the like without going through the card unit.

The payout control device 311, the ejection control device 312, the power supply device 313 and the card unit connection board 314 are housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material or the like. In particular, in the payout control device 311, similarly to the above-described main control device 261, the box base and the box cover constituting the substrate box 311b (wrapping means) are unopenably connected by a sealing unit (sealing means). The board box 311b is sealed.

As shown in FIG. 2, the payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 311c. For example, when the state recovery switch 311c is pressed when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging occurs in the dispensing motor, the dispensing motor 358a (see FIG. 4) is slowly rotated forward to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state). ) is planned.

Also, a RAM erase switch 323 is provided on the power monitor board 261b. The pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, so that even if a power failure should occur, the state at the time of the power failure can be maintained, and the state at the time of the power failure can be restored when the power is recovered from the power failure (recovery of power). Therefore, when the power is turned off in a normal procedure (for example, when the hall is closed), the state before the power is turned off is memorized and held. I am planning to put it in.

Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 203 is formed by integrating a resin-molded protective cover 353 and a game ball payout mechanism 352 .

The back pack unit 203 is provided with a tank 355 which opens upward at the uppermost portion thereof, and the tank 355 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from island facilities (game island facilities) of the game hall. Below the tank 355 is connected a tank rail 356 which has, for example, two rows of ball passages in the horizontal direction and gently slopes downward toward the downstream side. are connected. A payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 357, and payout of the required number of game balls is appropriately performed by a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor 358a. The game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper tray 19 through a payout passage (not shown) or the like.

Also, the tank rail 356 is provided with a vibrator 360 for applying vibration to the tank rail 356 . For example, a vibrator 360 is fastened and attached to the tank rail 356 with, for example, two screws. Furthermore, the vibrator 360 does not come into surface contact with the tank rail 356 but comes into contact with the two screws, so that the vibrations of the vibrator 360 are transmitted to the tank rail 356 more effectively. Therefore, if ball clogging occurs near the tank rail 356, the vibrator 360 is driven to eliminate the ball clogging.

A payout relay board (not shown) for relaying a payout command signal from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358 is installed in the payout mechanism section 352, and a power switch board 382 for taking in main power from the outside is installed. is set up. The power switch board 382 is supplied with a main power supply of, for example, 24 V AC via a voltage converter, and is turned on or off by a switching operation of the power switch 382a.

The payout mechanism part 352 from the tank 355 to the payout passage (not shown) is molded from a conductive resin material (eg, conductive polycarbonate resin) and partly grounded. . As a result, the generation of noise due to electrification of the game ball is suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 2, an inner frame open detection switch 388 for detecting that the inner frame 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11 is provided on the upper right side of the inner frame 12 . When the inner frame 12 is opened, it is output from the inner frame open detection switch 388 to the computer for inside the hall (inside the pachinko parlor).

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 261, a payout control device 311, a launch control device 312, a sub control device 262, a display control device 45, an audio output control device 47, a power supply device 313, and the like. . These devices are individually described in detail below.

The main controller 261 of the pachinko machine 10 is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 501, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 502. A RAM 503 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated.

The RAM 503 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. It has memory and area.

In other words, when the power supply is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 executes the normal processing to the end, so the RAM 503 stores the It suffices to memorize and hold the contents of the counter buffer and the reserved ball storage area, and when the power is turned on again, the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power was turned off. Specifically, there is no need to provide a dedicated backup area in the RAM 503 for storing the values of each register, I/O, etc. regarding game information during normal processing when the power is turned off. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 is configured to receive a power failure signal S1 output from a power failure monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. Upon occurrence, power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed.

An input/output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 containing the ROM 502 and RAM 503 through a bus line 504 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 505 includes a RAM erasure switch circuit 543, a payout control device 311, a launch control device 312, a sub-control device 262, a first symbol display device 40, a second symbol display device 41, and other switches (not shown). etc. are connected. The main controller 261 also has a function of controlling the variable display of the first symbol on the first symbol display device 40 and the variable display of the second symbol on the second symbol display device 41 .

The RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, like the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 described above, is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. , RAM 513 includes memories and areas for temporarily storing various data.

The RAM 513 stores and retains information regarding the state at the time of power-off in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power-off when power is turned on again when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. In other words, the storage of the RAM 513 is executed by the NMI interrupt processing and the step of the second half of the payout control processing when the power is turned off, and conversely, the information stored in the RAM 513 is restored by the power recovery processing when the power is turned on. .

An input/output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 containing the ROM 512 and RAM 513 via a bus line 514 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 515 is connected to the main controller 261, the firing controller 312, the dispensing motor 358a, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 4, the launch control device 312 permits or prohibits the launching of game balls by the launching device 229, and the launching device 229 is permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the launch control device 312 receives the card unit connection signal S4 from the payout control device 311 (a signal output when the card unit described above is connected to the pachinko machine 10), and the player A touch detection signal S5 output when the game ball shooting handle 18 is touched, and output when the shooting stop switch 18a provided on the game ball shooting handle 18 for stopping shooting is not operated. On the condition that all of the firing sustaining signal S6 received are input, the firing permitting signal S7 is output to the main controller 261. Also, a volume signal S10 corresponding to the amount of operation of the game ball shooting handle 18 is input from the game ball shooting handle 18 to the shooting control device 312, and the shooting control device 312 outputs this volume signal S10 to the main control device 261. do.

That is, the firing permission state is established while the firing permission signal S7 is ON (high level), and the firing non-permission state is established while the firing permission signal S7 is OFF (low level). That is, the main controller 261, during the period in which the input launch permission signal S7 is ON, the launch control signal S8 (pulse signal) for controlling the launch solenoid (not shown) that shoots the game ball, and the launch rail A ball feed control signal S9 (pulse signal) for controlling a ball feed solenoid for feeding game balls is repeatedly output to the launch control device 312 at a predetermined repetition cycle. The amplitude value of the firing control signal S8 (pulse signal) is determined by the main controller 261 based on the volume signal S10. ) becomes larger. The shooting control device 312 drives and controls the shooting device 229 based on the shooting control signal S8 and the ball feeding control signal S9, and the game ball is shot with an intensity corresponding to the operation amount of the game ball shooting handle 18. Conversely, the main controller 261 does not output the firing control signal S8 and the ball feed control signal S9 to the firing control device 312 while the input firing permission signal S7 is OFF. is never fired.

The display control device 45 controls the variable display of the third pattern (decorative pattern) in the third pattern display device 42 . The display control device 45 includes a CPU 521 , a ROM (program ROM) 522 , a work RAM 523 , a video RAM 524 , a character ROM 525 , an image controller 526 , an input port 527 , an output port 529 , bus lines 530 and 531 . and The input of the input port 527 is connected to the output of the sub-controller 262 , and the output of the input port 527 is connected to the CPU 521 , the ROM 522 , the work RAM 523 and the image controller 526 . An output port 529 is connected to the image controller 526 via a bus line 531, and the output of the output port 529 is connected to the third pattern display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 controls the decorative design display on the third design display device 42 based on various commands sent from the main control device 261 after being edited by the sub-control device 262 . The ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and the work RAM 523 temporarily stores work data and flags used when executing various programs by the CPU 521. memory for

The video RAM 524 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 42. By rewriting the contents of the video RAM 524, the display contents of the third symbol display device 42 are changed. The character ROM 525 is a memory for storing character data such as decorative designs displayed on the third design display device 42 . The image controller 526 adjusts the timings of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, and the output port 529 to intervene in the reading and writing of data. It is displayed on the pattern display device 42 .

The sound output control device 46 controls output of normal sound from the sound output section 24a and output of specific sound from the sound output section 24b. As shown in FIG. 5, the voice output control device 46 includes a CPU 561, a ROM 562, a RAM 563, and the like. The CPU 561 and RAM 563 execute processing for controlling the output of the normal sound and the output of the specific sound in accordance with the display effects on the third symbol display device 42 . The ROM 562 stores programs for voice output processing and sound data corresponding to normal voices and specific sounds. The audio output unit 24a includes an amplifier 24a1 and a speaker 24a2 for outputting normal audio. The audio output unit 24b includes an amplifier 24b1 and a speaker 24b2 for outputting a specific sound or a one-shot notification sound.

The power supply device 313 also includes a power supply section 541 for supplying power to each section of the pachinko machine 10 . The power supply unit 541 supplies necessary operating power to each of the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 541 takes in an AC 24V power supply supplied from the outside, and generates +12V power supply for driving various switches and motors, +5V power supply for logic, backup power supply for RAM backup, etc. Then, these +12V power supply, +5V power supply and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like. An operating power source (+12V power source, +5V power source, etc.) is supplied to the launch control device 312 via the payout control device 311 .

As shown in FIG. 4, the main controller 261 includes a main control board 261a and a power monitoring board 261b separate from the main control board 261a in a board box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. . The power monitoring board 261b includes a power failure monitoring circuit 542 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure or the like, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 543 connected to the RAM erasing switch 323 .

The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal S1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors the voltage of AC 24 volts in the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power failure (power failure) has occurred when the time for which this voltage becomes less than 22 volts exceeds, for example, 20 milliseconds. , and outputs a power failure signal S1 to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311 . By the output of this power failure signal S1, the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311 recognize the occurrence of power failure and execute power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing).

It should be noted that the power supply unit 541 continues to operate the power supply unit 541 for a sufficient period of time to execute the power failure processing even after 20 milliseconds have passed since the AC 24 volts monitored by the power supply unit 541 became less than 22 volts. It is configured to maintain the output of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311 can normally execute and complete the power failure process.

The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit for taking in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clearing the backup data of the RAM 503 of the main controller 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout controller 311 according to the state of the switch 323 . When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs the RAM erase signal S2 to the main control board 261a. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM erasing switch 323 is pressed (including power-on due to power failure cancellation), the data in the RAM 503 is cleared in the main controller 261, and the payout controller 311 is the main controller. 261, the data in the RAM 513 is cleared.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 6, the third pattern display device 42 (liquid crystal display device) is provided with three decorative pattern rows L, M and R, left, middle and right. Three decorative patterns, ie, an upper decorative pattern, a middle decorative pattern and a lower decorative pattern are variably displayed for each M and R. In the present embodiment, the series of patterns is composed of a main decorative pattern SZ to which the numbers "0" to "9" are respectively attached, and a secondary decorative pattern FZ consisting of a diamond-shaped picture pattern. Main decorative designs SZ are displayed in ascending or descending order, and secondary decorative designs FZ are arranged between the main decorative designs SZ to form a series of decorative design rows L, M, and R. The main decorative pattern SZ and the sub-decorative pattern FZ are variably displayed from top to bottom with periodicity.

In this case, in the left decorative design row L, the above series of decorative designs are displayed in descending order (that is, in order of decreasing number of the main decorative design SZ), and in the middle decorative design row M and the right decorative design row R, the same The above series of decorative designs are displayed in ascending order (that is, the order in which the numbers of the main decorative designs SZ increase). Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of left decorative pattern row L→right decorative pattern row R→middle decorative pattern row M, and at the time of stopping, five effective lines on the third pattern display device 42, that is, the upper line L1 and the middle line. If the main decorative pattern SZ is a combination of jackpot patterns (in this embodiment, a combination of the same main decorative patterns SZ) on any of L2, lower line L3, rightward rising line L4, and leftward rising line L5, a special jackpot is awarded. A game video is displayed.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

In this embodiment, the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 uses the random numbers related to the actuation of the accessory and the other random numbers used for the game to draw the first symbol display device 40 (jackpot lottery: first lottery). Pattern jackpot lottery) and pattern display setting, lottery of the second pattern display device 41 (second pattern winning lottery) and pattern display setting, decorative pattern (third pattern) of the third pattern display device 42 A lottery and setting for the variable display are to be carried out.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. A jackpot pattern counter C2 used for selecting a jackpot pattern on the pattern display device 40, an initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a lottery for the winning of the second pattern display device 41. A 2-symbol random number counter C4 and an initial value 2-symbol random number counter CINI2 used to set the initial value of the 2-symbol random number counter C4 are used.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, as other random numbers used for games, as shown in FIG. The stop pattern selection counter C3 used for selecting the stop pattern, the variation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 used for selecting the variation pattern of the decorative design of the third design display device 42, and the outlier design of the second design display device 41 A second symbol missing symbol counter C5 used for selection is used. Each counter described above is configured by a program executed by the CPU 501 .

For example, "stop pattern 0" indicates a group of completely outlier fluctuation patterns consisting of a plurality of types of completely outlier fluctuation patterns, and "stop pattern 1" is a group of outlier reach fluctuation patterns consisting of a plurality of types of outlier reach fluctuation patterns. , "Stop pattern 2" indicates a group of reach fluctuation patterns other than front and rear deviation consisting of a plurality of types of reach fluctuation patterns other than front and rear deviation, and "Stop pattern 3" is a plurality of types of normal jackpot fluctuation patterns. "Stop pattern 4" indicates a probability variable jackpot variation pattern group consisting of a plurality of types of probability variable jackpot variation patterns.

All of these counters C1-C5, CINI1-CINI2, CS1-CS3 add "1" to the previous value each time they are updated (hereinafter referred to as "update"), and reset to "0" after reaching the maximum value. It is a return loop counter. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 shown in FIG. In addition, the RAM 503 is provided with one execution area and a reserved ball storage area consisting of four reserved areas (first reserved area, second reserved area, third reserved area, fourth reserved area), In each of these areas, values such as a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot pattern counter C2 and a stop pattern selection counter C3 are set according to the winning history of game balls to the first start port 33a and the second start port 33b. It is stored chronologically. The winning of the game ball to the first starting port 33a and the second starting port 33b is also called establishment of the starting condition. Each value stored in the execution area is called an executed variation display, and each value stored in the holding ball storage area is also called an unexecuted variation display.

Specifically, if the starting condition is satisfied during the period when neither the executed or unexecuted variable display is stored in the execution area or the holding ball storage area, the executed variable display will be displayed in the execution area. is stored. If the start condition is satisfied during the period when the execution area is storing the variable display of the execution area, the unexecuted parts are displayed in the order of the first reservation area, the second reservation area, the third reservation area, and the fourth reservation area. is stored. When the executed variable display is stored in the execution area, a variable non-execution condition is established in which the symbol variable display is not executed with respect to the unexecuted variable display stored in the reserved ball storage area.

The variable display of unexecuted items stored in the first, second, third, and fourth reservation areas are also called the first, second, third, and fourth reservations.

The unexecuted variable display stored in the reserved ball storage area corresponds to the unexecuted variable display of the invention according to (C1), and the reserved ball storage area is the holding means of the invention according to (C1). corresponds to

Each counter described above will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. The jackpot random number counter C1, for example, is configured to be incremented by one within the range of "0" to "599" and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "599"). In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The initial value random number counter CINI1 is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599), and is updated once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 12) described later, and normal processing described later. (see FIG. 9) is repeatedly updated within the remaining time. The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 12), which will be described later), and the game ball has entered the first start port 33a and the second start port 33b. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 at the timing.

The hit value of the jackpot random number counter C1, that is, the number of random number values to be a jackpot, is set to two types, one for low probability and another for high probability, and the number of random number values for jackpot at low probability is two. , the value is "150,450", and the number of random number values that become a big hit at a high probability is four, and the values are "50, 150, 350, 450". That is, the jackpot probability is 1/300 when the probability is low, and the jackpot probability is 1/150 when the probability is high. In addition, the high probability time is, for example, a state in which a predetermined probability fluctuation pattern results in a jackpot, and the probability of the subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value, so-called "probability change" time, normal time (low probability time) refers to the time when such a variable state is not present. Also, the high probability (variable probability state) is continued until the next big win after the variable probability big win or the latent variable big win (after the big winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 opens over 16 rounds, for example).

The jackpot symbol counter C2 is the symbol when the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40 stops changing (in this embodiment, the final display symbol after the fluctuation display of the first segment display unit 40a) when the jackpot is won. ). In this embodiment, the jackpot pattern counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, "0" to "9", and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "9"). there is The jackpot symbol counter C2 is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt (see FIG. 12) to be described later) in the same manner as the jackpot random number counter C1 described above, and the game balls enter the first start port 33a and the first start port 33a. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 at the timing of winning the starting port 33b of No. 2. In addition, when the above-described jackpot random number counter C1 is hit and the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is "1", "4", or "7", the first segment display section 40a of the first symbol display device 40 stops at the third symbol to indicate a low-probability jackpot, a so-called normal jackpot (non-specific hit). Also, when the above-described jackpot random number counter C1 is hit and the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is "0", "2", "5", or "8", the first symbol display device 40 The segment display portion 40a stops at the first symbol to indicate a high-probability jackpot, a so-called variable probability jackpot (specific win). Further, when the above-described jackpot random number counter C1 is hit and the value of the jackpot pattern counter C2 is "3", "6", or "9", the first segment display section 40a of the first pattern display device 40 stops at the second symbol to indicate a jackpot at high latency probability, a so-called latent probability variable jackpot (latency specific hit). When the big hit random number counter C1 is out, regardless of the value of the big hit symbol counter C2, the first segment display section 40a of the first symbol display device 40 stops at the fourth symbol to indicate a loss. In other words, as the distribution of the jackpot types, probability variation: latent probability variation: normal = 4:3:3.

In addition, the stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, "0" to "238", and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 determines that the final stop decorative pattern after the reach of the decorative pattern on the third pattern display device 42 occurs is shifted forward or backward of the reach decorative pattern by one and stops. Similarly, a lottery is drawn for "reach other than front and rear out" in which the final stop decorative pattern after reaching reaches stops other than before and after the reach decorative patterns, and "complete loss" in which reach does not occur. For example, C3=0 to 201 corresponds to complete loss, C3=202 to 208 corresponds to front-rear out-of-reach reach, and C3=209-238 corresponds to non-rear-rear out-of-rear reach. The content of the lottery (drawing of reach) of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is whether the pachinko machine 10 is at the time of low probability or at the time of high probability, or whether the variation time reduction function of the first symbol display device 40 is not activated. It may be individually set according to whether it is active or not, how many balls are active at the start of the fluctuation of the first symbol, and the like. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt (see FIG. 12), which will be described later), and the RAM 503 stored in the retained ball storage area.

Further, among the three fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, "0 to 198", and reaches "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "198"). , and the fluctuation type counter CS2 is, for example, incremented one by one within the range of "0 to 240", and after reaching the maximum value (that is, "240"), it returns to "0". The fluctuation type counter CS3, for example, is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of "0 to 162" and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "162"). In the following description, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is also called a "first fluctuation type counter", the fluctuation type counter CS2 is called a "second fluctuation type counter", and the fluctuation type counter CS3 is also called a "third fluctuation type counter". .

The first variation type counter CS1 determines a rough variation pattern group of decorative symbols, such as the reach type of decorative symbols (third symbol) such as so-called normal reach, super reach, premium reach, etc., and the type of complete loss. . Here, for example, it is assumed that the stop pattern selection counter C3 has a value indicating "stop pattern 1" (that is, a value indicating the front-rear off reach fluctuation pattern group), and the first fluctuation among the front-rear off reach fluctuation pattern groups Suppose that the variation pattern of the normal reach group (consisting of a plurality of different types of normal reach) is determined by the type counter CS1.

Subsequently, one variation pattern is determined by the second variation type counter CS2 from among the variation pattern group determined by the first variation type counter CS1 in this way. Here, for example, it is assumed that one type of normal reach is determined by the second variation type counter CS2 from the normal reach group. In addition, as a plurality of different types of normal reach, it is possible to realize by giving a difference such as a different elapsed time until the final stop decorative pattern (for example, the middle decorative pattern in this embodiment) stops after the occurrence of reach. is mentioned.

Subsequently, the third variation type counter CS3 determines which time to add the variation time in one variation pattern determined by the second variation type counter CS2. For example, as this addition time, when the decorative design (third design) of the middle decorative design row on the third design display device 42 stops sliding, the decorative design of the middle decorative design row slides and then Additional time, which is the time until the display is stopped, can be used. In this way, the variation type counters CS1 to CS3 can determine a more detailed decorative pattern variation mode. In other words, by combining these fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3, it is possible to easily realize diversification of fluctuation patterns.

In addition, the symbol variation mode is determined only by the first variation type counter CS1, the symbol variation mode is determined only by the first variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2, or the first variation type counter CS1 and the stop symbol It is also possible to determine the symbol variation mode by combining with , or to determine the symbol variation mode by combining the first variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 with the stop symbol.

The fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3 are updated once each time the normal process described later is executed, and are repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer values of the variation type counters CS1 to CS3 are obtained when determining the variation pattern when the first symbol display device 40 starts to vary the first symbol. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 7, the variation type counters CS1 to CS3 are acquired at the start of variation of the first symbol by the first symbol display device 40, so there is no need to store them in the holding ball storage area. , it is only necessary to sequentially update and store them in the counter buffer.

Note that the size and range of each counter described above are only examples and can be changed arbitrarily. However, it is desirable that the sizes of the jackpot random number counter C1, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counters CS1 to CS3 are all different prime numbers, and are not synchronized in any case.

Further, as shown in FIG. 7, a second symbol random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol of the second symbol display device 41. FIG. The second symbol random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one within a range of, for example, "0" to "250" and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). The second symbol random number counter C4 is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt (see FIG. 12), which will be described later), and is obtained when the game ball passes through either the left or right second starting port 34. There are 149 random numbers to be won, and the range is "5 to 153".

In particular, when the second symbol random number counter C4 makes one round, the initial value of the second symbol random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second symbol random number counter C4. The initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 is a loop counter similar to the second symbol random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is updated once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 12), which will be described later. , is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing (see FIG. 9), which will be described later. The second symbol random number counter C4 is periodically updated (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 12), which will be described later), and at the timing when the game ball passes through the second starting port 34, the RAM 503 It is stored in the 2-symbol reserve storage area.

That is, the RAM 503 also has a second symbol reservation storage area which is an area different from the reservation ball storage area, and includes one second symbol execution area and four second symbol reservation areas (second 1st to 4th areas for design reservation) are provided, and in each of these areas, according to the winning history of the game ball to the second start port 34, the second pattern reservation storage area is provided. Each value of the two-symbol random number counter C4 is stored in chronological order.

In addition, the second symbol missing symbol counter C5 is updated once each time the second symbol control process of the normal process in FIG. When the buffer is updated and acquired and the second symbol random number counter C4 is stored in the second symbol reserved ball storage area, the second symbol lost symbol counter C5 updated and acquired by this second symbol lost symbol buffer is also the second symbol. Stored in the reserved ball storage area. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 7, when the value of the second symbol random number counter C4 is a failure, "X" is drawn based on the value of the second symbol lost symbol counter C5 in the second symbol reserved ball storage area. The displayed display portion 41b is illuminated. It should be noted that the second symbol variation display result may be performed based only on the second symbol random number counter C4 without providing the second symbol discrepancy symbol counter C5. In other words, if the second symbol random number counter C4 wins, the display portion 41a drawn with "O" is lit, and if the prize is lost, the display portion 41b with "x" is lit.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 8 to 18. FIG. The processing of the CPU 501 can be broadly classified into main processing that is activated when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is periodically activated (every 2 msec in this embodiment), and power failure to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). There is an NMI interrupt process that is activated by the input of a signal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be explained first, and then the main process will be explained.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing, which is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 every 2 msec, for example.

In FIG. 12, first, in step S601, various prize winning switches are read. That is, it reads the states of various switches (except for the RAM erase switch 323) connected to the main controller 261, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

After that, in step S602, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 are updated. Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value ("599" in this embodiment), it is cleared to "0", and the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one and cleared to "0" when the counter value reaches the maximum value ("250" in this embodiment) and is incremented by one. Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503 (see FIG. 7).

Further, as shown in FIG. 12, in subsequent step S603, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit symbol counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot pattern counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment, "599", "9", "250") are cleared to "0" when incremented by one. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C3 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 503 (see FIG. 7).

After that, as shown in FIG. 12, in step S604, a starting prize-winning process associated with the winning of the first starting port 33a and the second starting port 33b is executed. This starting winning process will be explained with reference to the flow chart of FIG. 13. At step S701, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the first starting hole 33a or the second starting hole 33b based on the detection information of the operating hole switch. When it is determined that the game ball has won the first starting port 33a and the second starting port 33b, in the following step S702, the number N of operation pending balls of the first symbol display device 40 reaches the upper limit value (this embodiment Then, it is determined whether or not 4) is less than. On the condition that there is a winning to the first starting port 33a and the second starting port 33b and that the number N of operation pending balls is N<4, the process proceeds to step S703, and the number N of operation pending balls is incremented by one.

In addition, in the following step S704, a random number related to winning or losing the first symbol is obtained. Specifically, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot pattern counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 updated in step S603 are stored in the first of the free storage areas in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 shown in FIG. area.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12, in subsequent step S605, a firing control process is executed. Specifically, in the firing control process, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261, as shown in FIG. A signal S9 is output to the shooting control device 312, and game ball shooting control by the shooting device 229 is performed. After executing the firing control process in this manner, the CPU 501 once terminates this timer interrupt process.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing, and this processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt, the state of main controller 261 at the time of power failure is stored in the backup area of RAM 503 .

That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, the power failure signal S1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 . Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. The NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 14 is stored in the ROM 502 of the main controller 261. FIG. For a predetermined time after the power failure signal S1 is output, power is supplied from the power supply unit 541 so that the processing of the main controller 261 can be executed, and NMI interrupt processing is executed within this predetermined time.

In the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 14, in step S801, power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area. In this embodiment, a flag is set for information on the occurrence of power failure and stored in the backup area.

Next, main processing will be described.
FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing an example of main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261, and this main processing is activated upon power-on reset.

First, in step S101, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 executes initial setting processing upon power-on. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Further, in step S102, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 waits for about one second, for example, to wait for the sub-side control devices (the sub-control device 262, the payout control device 311, etc.) to become operable. to run. In subsequent step S103, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 permits RAM access.

After that, data backup processing is executed for the RAM 503 in the CPU 501 . That is, in step S104, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 determines whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided on the power monitoring board 261b is pressed (ON). If so, the process proceeds to step S113. In the subsequent step S105, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 determines whether or not power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area of the RAM 503 (whether or not the power-off occurrence information flag is set). In step S106, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 calculates the RAM determination value, and in the following step S107, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 determines that the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved when the power was turned off. or not, that is, the validity of the backup. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of RAM 503 . It is also possible to determine the effectiveness of the backup by checking whether the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 are correctly saved.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is powered on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323 when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 323 is ON, the initialization process of the RAM 503 (step S113, etc.) is performed. Similarly, when power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the used RAM area is cleared and the RAM 503 is initialized (step S113, etc.). That is, in step S113, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 clears the used area of the RAM 503 to "0" and executes the initialization processing of the RAM 503. FIG.

In subsequent step S114, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 transmits a payout initialization command. Thus, the payout initialization command is output to the payout control device 311 when the main control device 261 is initialized.

Also, in step S115, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 transmits a power-on command to the sub-control board 262a. Since this power-on command includes a command for discriminating the model of the pachinko machine, the sub-side such as the sub-control board 262a and the display control device 45 can discriminate the model based on the content of the command. .

Also, in step S116, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 executes initial setting of the CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit). In step S117, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 sets interrupt permission, and shifts to normal processing (see FIG. 9), which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed, the power failure occurrence information is set and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. Execute the process (process at the time of power failure recovery). That is, in step S108, the power failure occurrence information is cleared. In step S109, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 transmits a payout return command to the payout control device 311 and instructs the payout control device 311 to start payout control. Although details will be described later, when the payout control device 311 receives a payout return command from the main control device 261, it returns and starts payout control.

In step S110, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 transmits a command to return the sub-side control device to the game state at the time of power failure. / Timer Circuit). Further, in step S112, interrupt permission is set, and then normal processing (see FIG. 9), which will be described later, is performed. For example, even if a power failure occurs in the middle of normal processing, the normal processing is executed up to the last step ("RAM access prohibition" step shown in FIG. 9) before the power is shut off. is executed from step S201, which is the first step of the normal processing.

Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. Main processing of the game is executed in this normal processing. As an overview, the processing of steps S201 to S207 is executed as regular processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S210 and S211 is executed during the remaining time.

In FIG. 9, first, in step S201, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 performs external output processing for transmitting output data such as commands updated in the previous process to each sub-side controller. Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information is determined, and if there is winning detection information, a prize ball payout command corresponding to the number of winning game balls is transmitted to the payout control device 311 . In addition, in conjunction with the first symbol variation display of the first symbol display device 40 (variation display of the first segment display section 40a), the third symbol display device 42 also performs the variation display of the decorative symbol (third symbol). However, when the variable display of the first pattern of the first pattern display device 40, a variation pattern designation command, a decorative pattern designation command, a complete stop command (determination command), etc. are transmitted to the sub-control device 262 in the external output process.

In this pachinko machine 10, at the start of variation of the first symbol, external output of normal processing is performed in the order of variation pattern designation command -> performance command (command for designating change of variation time, etc.) -> decoration design designation command. A predetermined number (for example, 3) of commands are sent each time processing is performed (that is, 3 commands are sent every 4 msec), and an all-stop command is sent at the timing when the fluctuation time has elapsed. Also, after the first pattern starts to fluctuate, a predetermined number (for example, three) each time the external output process of the normal process is performed in the order of the fluctuation pattern designation command → effect command → decorative design designation command (that is, three every 4 msec ) command may be sent, and the all-stop command may be sent at the timing when the variable time has elapsed.

The variation pattern designation command is a command for designating the variation pattern of the decorative design (third design) variably displayed on the third design display device 42 . The variation pattern designation command is transmitted from the main controller 261 to the sub-controller 262 and transmitted from the sub-controller 262 to the display controller 45 . The display control device 45 controls the third design display device 42 to display the variation pattern of the decorative design based on the transmitted variation pattern designation command.

The decorative pattern designation command is a variable display effect of the decorative pattern (third pattern) on the third pattern display device 42, which is a probability variable jackpot (specific hit), a latent probability variable jackpot (latency specific hit), and a normal jackpot (non-specific hit). This is a command for specifying which of , , and out. The decorative design designation command is transmitted from the main controller 261 to the sub-controller 262 and transmitted from the sub-controller 262 to the display controller 45 . The display control device 45 displays the display result of the variation pattern of the decorative design as a result in response to the transmitted decorative design designation command (probability variable jackpot (specific hit), latent probability variable jackpot (latent specific hit), normal jackpot (unspecified The display of the third symbol display device 42 is controlled so that the player wins or loses.

The all-stop command is a command for instructing to stop the variation pattern of the decorative symbols (third symbols) that are variably displayed on the third symbol display device 42 . The all-stop command is transmitted from the main controller 261 to the sub-controller 262 and transmitted from the sub-controller 262 to the display controller 45 . The display control device 45 controls the third symbol display device 42 to stop-display the variation pattern of the decorative symbols based on the transmitted all-stop command.

In addition, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sends a variation pattern designation command and an effect command (a command for designating a change in variation time, etc.) to the sub-control device 262 in the external output processing (step S201) of the normal processing. may be sent. That is, based on the value of the variation type counter CS3, it is determined which time to add the variation time (additional time by the sliding effect of the decorative symbol described above), and such addition time is appropriately sent to the sub-controller 262. A production command is used to give instructions. Therefore, after the first pattern starts to fluctuate, a predetermined number (for example, three) each time the external output process of the normal process is performed in the order of the fluctuation pattern designation command → effect command → decorative design designation command (that is, three every 4 msec One by one) command is sent out, and the all-stop command may be sent out at the timing when the variable time has passed.

Next, in step S202, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 updates the fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3. Specifically, each of the fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198, 240, 162 in this embodiment), each increment is "0 ” to clear. Then, the updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503 shown in FIG.

In subsequent step S203 in FIG. 9, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 reads the prize ball counting signal, the payout abnormality signal, and the lower tray full signal received from the payout control device 311. FIG. After that, in step S204, the first symbol variation processing for performing the variation display of the first symbol by the first symbol display device 40 is executed. By this first symbol variation processing, big hit determination, setting of variation pattern of the first symbol, and the like are performed. However, the details of the first symbol variation process will be described later.

After that, in step S205, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 executes a big winning opening opening/closing process for opening or closing the big winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 in the case of the jackpot state. In other words, the big winning hole 32a is opened for each round of the big win state, and for each round, it is checked whether the maximum opening time of the big winning hole 32a has passed or whether a specified number of game balls have entered the big winning hole 32a. judge. When any one of these conditions is established, the opening of the big winning hole 32a in that round is stopped and closed, and when there are remaining rounds, the opening of the big winning hole 32a is repeatedly executed for the number of remaining rounds.

Further, in step S206, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 executes display control of the second symbol by the second symbol display device 41. FIG. Briefly, on the condition that the game ball passes through the second starting port 34, the second symbol random number counter C4 is acquired each time, and at the display portions 41a and 41b of the second symbol display device 41, A variable display of the second symbol is performed. Then, a lottery for the second symbol is carried out according to the value of the second symbol random number counter C4, and when the second symbol wins, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261, as shown in step S207, selects the second symbol on the lower side. A process for opening the second starting port 33b is performed to open the starting port 33b for a predetermined period of time. Although the explanation is omitted, the second symbol random number counter C4 is also updated by the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. ing.

In step S208, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 determines whether or not power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area of the RAM 503 (whether or not a power-off occurrence information flag is set). If the power-off occurrence information is not set, the process proceeds to step S209, and if the power-off occurrence information is set, the process proceeds to step S212.

After that, in step S209, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next normal process, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal process. Then, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process, the initial value random number counter CINI1, the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counters CS1 to CS3 are repeatedly updated (steps S210, S211 ). That is, in step S210, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 are updated. Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by one, and cleared to "0" when the counter value reaches the maximum value ("599" in this embodiment) and is incremented by one. Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM503. Similarly, the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to "0" when incremented by 1 after reaching the maximum value ("250" in this embodiment). do. Then, the updated value of the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM503.

Further, in step S211, the fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3 are updated (similar to step S202). Specifically, the variation type counters CS1 to CS3 are incremented by 1, and their counter values reach the maximum value ("198", "240", "162" in this embodiment). Clear to "0" each time. Then, the updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM503.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S207 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by using the remaining time to repeatedly update the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2, the initial value random number counter CINI1 (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) and the initial The second symbol random number counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the second symbol random number counter C4) can be randomly updated.

In addition, in step S208, when power-off occurrence information is set and the process proceeds to step S212, the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 sets interrupt prohibition. Subsequently, in step S213, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 transmits to the other controllers a power-off notification command indicating that the power supply has been cut off quickly. Subsequently, in step S214, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 stops outputting the control signal. Subsequently, in step S215, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 calculates the RAM determination value and saves it in the backup area. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of RAM 503 . Subsequently, in step S216, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 prohibits RAM access. After that, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the complete shutdown of the power supply and the inability to execute processing.

Next, the first symbol variation process of step S204 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In FIG. 10, in step S401, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 determines whether or not the jackpot is currently in progress. It should be noted that during the big win includes the middle of the special game displayed on the third symbol display device 42 at the time of the big win and the middle of the predetermined time after the end of the special game. In subsequent step S402, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 determines whether or not the first symbol display device 40 is in the process of displaying the first symbol. Then, if the jackpot is not in progress and the first symbol is not being changed and displayed, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 proceeds to step S403, and determines whether the number N of operation pending balls of the first symbol display device 40 is greater than "0". determine whether or not At this time, if the jackpot is in progress, or if the number N of balls with operation pending is "0", the process is terminated as it is.

Further, if it is neither during the big win nor during the variable display of the first symbol, and if the number of operation pending balls N>0, the process proceeds to step S404. In step S404, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 subtracts "1" from the number N of balls to be activated. In step S405, a process of shifting the data stored in the reserved ball storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth reserved areas of the reserved ball storage area to the execution area side. The data in each area is shifted in the order of reserved first area, reserved third area→reserved second area, reserved fourth area→reserved third area, and so on.

Thereafter, in step S406, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 executes fluctuation start processing. Here, the fluctuation start processing will be described in detail using the flowchart of FIG. Based on this, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit. Specifically, whether or not it is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the big hit random number counter C1 and the mode at that time (whether it is a variable probability state or a normal state). ``150, 450'' out of the numerical values ``0'' to ``599'' of the jackpot random number counter C1 are the winning values (two), and when the probability is high, the winning values are ``50, 150, 350, 450'' (four). be.

When the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines that it is a big win, in step S502, the big win symbol corresponding to the value of the big win symbol counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, that is, the first symbol is displayed. Which of the first to third symbols to be displayed on the first segment display section 40a of the device 40 is determined. That is, based on a table (not shown) representing the correspondence relationship between the value of the jackpot pattern counter C2 and the patterns, the jackpot pattern (“specific hit pattern”, “latent specific hit pattern” or "Non-specific winning pattern") is obtained.

Next, in step S503, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 determines a variation pattern (jackpot effect pattern) at the time of the jackpot. Specifically, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, without using the stop pattern selection counter C3, the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 and the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503 Confirm in order and determine the variation pattern.

That is, based on the value of the jackpot pattern counter C2, whether the decorative pattern on the third pattern display device 42 is displayed in the normal jackpot (non-specific hit) "stop pattern 3", or whether the third pattern display device 42 is displayed. It is determined whether or not the decorative pattern is to be displayed in the "stop pattern 4" of the probability variable jackpot (specific win). The type of "stop pattern 3" or "stop pattern 4" thus determined is further determined based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1. In other words, a general variation pattern group of the decorative design is determined, such as the reach type of the decorative design (third design) such as normal reach, super reach, premium reach, and the like. Subsequently, one variation pattern is determined from the thus determined rough variation pattern group of decorative symbols based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2. For example, based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2, finer decorative patterns such as setting the elapsed time until the final stop decorative pattern (middle decorative pattern in the present embodiment) stops after the occurrence of reach to a predetermined time Determine the mode of variation. In addition, the following relationships in the case of a big hit, that is, the relationship between the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 and the stop pattern, the relationship between the value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern, and the value of the second variation type counter CS2 The relationship with the stop symbol time is defined in advance by a big hit table or the like.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S501 that it is not a big hit, in step S504, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 displays the winning symbol, that is, the first segment display portion 40a of the first symbol display device 40 with the fourth symbol. It is set as a stop symbol to stop display.

Next, in step S505, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 determines a variation pattern (loss performance pattern) at the time of failure, and sets the failure variation pattern as a variation pattern designation command. Specifically, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 confirms the values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the execution area of the held ball storage area of the RAM 503 in that order, and determines the variation pattern. decide.

That is, based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, the final stop decorative pattern after occurrence of the reach of the decorative pattern on the third pattern display device 42 shifts by one to the front and rear of the reach decorative pattern and stops. "Stop pattern 1", which is "stop pattern 1", which is "reach other than front and back off" in which the final stop decorative pattern stops other than before and after the reach decorative pattern after the same reach occurs, and "stop pattern 2" which is "reach other than front and back off", and "complete off , or "stop pattern 0". For example, if the determined stop pattern is "stop pattern 1", which is a reach out of the front and back, for example, based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1, normal reach, super reach from the change pattern group of reach out of the front and back A rough variation pattern group of decorative symbols is determined, for example, a variation pattern in which the reach type of the decorative symbol (third symbol) such as is determined is determined. It is assumed here that normal reach is determined. Subsequently, one variation pattern is further determined from the thus determined normal reach variation pattern group of rough decorative symbols based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2. For example, based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2, finer decorative patterns such as setting the elapsed time until the final stop decorative pattern (middle decorative pattern in the present embodiment) stops after the occurrence of reach to a predetermined time Determine the mode of variation. The following relationships in the case of deviation, that is, the relationship between the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the stop pattern, the relationship between the value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern, the value of the second variation type counter CS2 , and the stop symbol time are defined in advance by a table or the like for losing.

In the present embodiment, one of the tables for outliers described above is, for example, at a low probability, in the state of the variation time shortening function of the first symbol display device 40, at the start of variation of the first symbol. There is something that is adopted when the number of operation suspensions of the first symbol is "0", and when the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is "0 to 201", it corresponds to no reach (completely out), " 202 to 208” correspond to front-rear out-of-order reach, and “209-238” correspond to non-front-rear out-of-order reach.

Subsequently, in step S506, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 decides to add the production time, that is, decides to add the production time of the big hit variation pattern determined in step S503 or the deviation variation pattern determined in step S505. conduct. More specifically, based on the value of the variation type counter CS3, the decorative pattern (third pattern) of the middle decorative pattern row in the third pattern display device 42 stops slipping, etc. Increase in production time (the middle decoration A variation pattern is determined, including an increase in the amount of time before a decorative symbol in the symbol row slides until it is displayed stationary.

In step S507, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 issues a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the big hit variation pattern determined in step S503 or a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the outlier variation pattern determined in step S505. set.

Subsequently, in step S508, when steps S502 and S503 have passed, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 selects the jackpot pattern (“specific winning pattern” or “non- When the decorative design designation command corresponding to the "specific winning design") is set, and steps S504 and S505 are passed, the decorative design designation command corresponding to the missing design of the first design display device 40 determined in step S504 is issued. set.

Subsequently, in step S509, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets an effect time addition designation command corresponding to the effect time addition determined in step S506, and ends this process.

Returning to the description of FIG. 10, if step S402 is YES, ie, the first symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the process proceeds to step S407, and the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 determines whether or not the first symbol variation time has elapsed. determine whether The variation time of the first symbol is determined based on the variation pattern determined as described above with reference to FIG. 11 and the effect time addition. is determined, and step S407 is affirmatively determined when this variation time has elapsed. If the variable time has not passed, the process proceeds to step S408, and if the variable time has passed, the process proceeds to step S409.

Then, in step S408, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 updates the variable display of the first symbol on the first symbol display device 40. FIG. In other words, the variable display of the first segment display portion 40a of the first symbol display device 40 is continued, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in step S409, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 stops the variable display of the first symbol and sets the stop symbol of the first symbol to the displayed symbol. That is, when the jackpot pattern (probability variable jackpot) is determined in step S502 of FIG. Stop display with a symbol (meaning a probability variable jackpot (specific hit)). When the jackpot pattern (latency probability variable jackpot) is determined in step S502 of FIG. Stop display with (meaning latent probability variable jackpot (latency specific hit)). When the jackpot pattern (normal jackpot) is determined in step S502 of FIG. 11, after the variable display of the first segment display portion 40a of the first pattern display device 40, the first segment display portion 40a is displayed with the third symbol. Stop display (usually means a jackpot (non-specific win)). If it is determined to be a lost symbol in step S504 of FIG. 11, after the variable display of the first segment display portion 40a of the first symbol display device 40, the first segment display portion 40a is stopped and displayed with the fourth symbol ( means outside).

Subsequently, in step S410, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets an all stop command for instructing the stop of the variation pattern of the decorative design (third design) variably displayed on the third design display device 42, After that, this process is terminated.

Next, the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing the main processing of the payout control device 311, and this main processing is activated when the power is turned on.

First, in step S901, initial setting processing is executed upon power-on. Specifically, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 sets a stack address and an interrupt mode. In step S902, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 permits RAM access, and in step S903, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 sets an external interrupt vector.

After that, in step S904, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 determines whether information on the occurrence of power failure is set in the backup area of the RAM 513 or not. In step S905, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 calculates the RAM determination value. determine gender. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of RAM 513 . It is also possible to determine the effectiveness of the backup by checking whether the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly saved.

Subsequently, in step S907, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 initializes the RAM 513 when power is restored. Specifically, when the main control device 261 is initialized, a payout initialization command is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 receives the payout initialization command from the main control device 261. When the reset command is received, the RAM 513 is initialized at power recovery in step S907. In other words, the RAM area is initialized, and the game ball payout control is started.

Therefore, when the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed (ON) when the power is turned on, the main control device 261 is initialized, and a payout initialization command is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311. As a result, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 initializes the RAM 513 based on the payout initialization command from the main control device 261 .

Subsequently, in step S908, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 performs initial setting of the peripheral device of the CPU 511 concerned. Specifically, the CPU peripheral device is a timer control device called CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit), which is set to a predetermined value to generate a timer interrupt every 2 milliseconds (ms).

Subsequently, in step S909, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 sets interrupt permission, and shifts to payout control processing described later.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not set in step S904, or if the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) in step S906, the payout control device 311 The CPU 511 clears the entire area of the RAM 513 to "0" (step S910) and performs initialization processing (step S911).

Next, the flow of payout control processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In FIG. 16, at step S1001, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 acquires a command from the main control device 261 and stores it. Here, as commands to be stored, 15 types of prize ball commands (15 types of prize ball commands for instructing the payout of 1 to 15 balls) and the start of payout control to the payout control device 311 are instructed. There are 17 types of commands including a payout return command for the purpose and a payout initialization command for instructing the payout control device 311 to initialize the payout.

In step S1002, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 determines whether or not the payout permission has been received. That is, it is determined whether or not a payout return command or a prize ball command is received. In addition, in step S1003, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 checks the state return switch (not shown), and executes the state return operation when determining to start the state return operation.

Thereafter, in step S1004, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 executes setting of the lower tray full state or the lower tray full state canceled state according to the change in the state of the lower tray 15. FIG. That is, the full state of the lower tray 15 is determined by the detection signal of the lower tray full switch. , execute the setting of the lower tray full state release state.

Further, in step S1005, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 executes the setting of the no-ball-in-tank state or the no-ball-in-tank cancellation state according to the change in the state of the ball in the tank. That is, the no-ball-in-tank state is determined by the detection signal of the no-ball-in-tank switch. Run the settings.

After that, in step S1006, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 determines whether or not there is a state to be notified.

In steps S1007 to S1009, prize ball payout processing is executed. In this case, if the prize balls are not dispensable and the total number of prize balls stored in step S1001 is not "0" (both steps S1007 and S1008 are NO), the process advances to step S1009 to perform prize ball control processing ( FIG. 17) to be described later is started. Also, if the payout of prize balls is disabled or if the total number of prize balls is 0 (YES in either step S1007 or S1008), the process proceeds to the process of paying out balls for rent.

After that, in steps S1010 to S1012, the process of paying out rental balls is executed. In this case, if the ball is not dispensable and a request for ball dispensation is received from the card unit (NO in step S1010, YES in step S1011), the process proceeds to step S1012 to perform ball rental control processing (to be described later). FIG. 18) is started. Also, if the ball cannot be dispensed or the ball dispensation request has not been received (YES in step S1010 or NO in step S1011), subsequent vibration motor control (step S1013) is executed.

In step S1013, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 executes control (vibration motor control) of the vibrator 360 (see FIG. 2). After that, in step S1014, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 determines whether a power failure has occurred. If a power failure has occurred, the process proceeds to step S1015; otherwise, the process returns to step S1001. In step S1015, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 sets occurrence information of power interruption, and in step S1016, creates a RAM determination value. After that, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the complete shutdown of the power supply and the inability to execute processing.

Here, in the prize ball control process shown in FIG. 17, in step S1101, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute payout of prize balls. In the subsequent step S1102, it is determined whether or not the rotation of the payout motor 358a is normal based on the detection result of the payout rotation sensor. If the rotation of the payout motor 358a is not normal, the process advances to step S1103 to drive the payout motor 358a to execute retry processing and stop processing of the payout motor 358a, and then return to the payout control processing of FIG.

If the rotation of the payout motor 358a is normal, the process proceeds to step S1104, and it is determined by the detection result of the payout count switch whether or not the game balls are normally counted. If the count of game balls is not normal, the process proceeds to step S1105, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the retry process and the stop process of the payout motor 358a is executed, and then the process returns to the payout control process of FIG.

Further, if the count of game balls is normal, the process proceeds to step S1106, and it is determined whether or not the number of game balls counted by the payout count switch reaches the total number of prize balls and the payout is completed. If the payout has been completed, the stop processing of the payout motor 358a is executed in step S1107, and then the payout control processing of FIG. 16 is returned to.

In the ball rental control process shown in FIG. 18, in step S1201, the ball rental motor 358a is driven to execute the ball rental. In the following step S1202, it is determined whether or not the rotation of the payout motor 358a is normal based on the detection result of the payout rotation sensor. If the rotation of the payout motor 358a is not normal, the process advances to step S1203 to drive the payout motor 358a to execute retry processing and stop processing of the payout motor 358a, and then return to the payout control processing of FIG.

Also, if the rotation of the payout motor 358a is normal, the process proceeds to step S1204, and it is determined by the detection result of the payout count switch whether or not the game balls are normally counted. If the count of game balls is not normal, the process proceeds to step S1205, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the retry process and the stop process of the payout motor 358a is executed, and then the process returns to the payout control process of FIG.

Further, if the game ball count is normal, the process advances to step S1206 to determine whether or not the number of game balls counted by the payout count switch reaches a predetermined number of rental balls (25) and payout is completed. If the payout has been completed, the stop processing of the payout motor 358a is executed in step S1207, and then the payout control processing of FIG. 16 is returned to.

The above NMI interrupt processing is similarly executed in the payout control device 311, and the state of the payout control device 311 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like is stored in the backup area of the RAM 513 by the NMI interrupt. Similarly, power is supplied from the power supply unit 541 so that the processing of the payout control device 311 can be executed for a predetermined time after the power failure signal S1 is output. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal S1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed. to start the NMI interrupt processing in FIG. The contents are as explained in FIG.

Next, main processing and normal processing of the sub-controller 262 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20. FIG. FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing an example of main processing executed by the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262, and this main processing is activated upon power-on reset. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of normal processing executed by the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262. As shown in FIG.

First, in step S1301, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 executes initial setting processing upon power-on. Specifically, port settings (port I/O switching and initial value output), timer settings (1 millisecond interval timer, liquid crystal command strobe output timer), and interrupt settings (sub-command strobe interrupt) are performed. .

Also, in step S1302, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the power-off process has not been completed. Specifically, whether or not the various lamps (annular illumination part 102, central illumination part 103, etc.) of the front frame set 14 of the pachinko machine 10 are all turned off and the speaker is in a mute state is checked. discriminate. If the power-off process has not been completed, the process proceeds to step S1304; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1303.

Subsequently, in step S1303, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the RAM of the sub-control device 262 has been destroyed, and if destroyed, proceeds to step S1304, otherwise proceeds to step S1307. . In step S1304, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 performs a RAM area read/write check of the sub-controller 262. FIG. Then, in step S1305, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 determines whether the RAM of the sub-controller 262 is normal. If the RAM of the sub-controller 262 is normal, the process proceeds to step S1306, and if abnormal, the process proceeds to step S1312. In step S1306, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 writes RAM destruction check data for each area of the RAM 553, and sets RAM destruction check data for determining destruction if there is a reading error.

Then, in step S1307, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the power is turned on after being turned off. If the power is turned on after being turned off, the process proceeds to step S1308; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1309.

In step S1308, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 clears the RAM area other than the unprocessed RAM area. Specifically, the unprocessed RAM area is an area for storing information that will cause system problems if the data is cleared, and is an area for information that should be retained except when the RAM area is destroyed. For example, sub-command reception buffer, power-on information, etc. can be cited. When the main controller 261 is powered off and the sub-controller 262 is reset (when a power-off notification command is received from the main controller 261), the RAM area other than the unprocessed RAM area is cleared.

In step S1309, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 sets interrupt permission. In step S 1310 , the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 performs initial value setting of the RAM of the sub-controller 262 . In step S1311, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the effect initialization flag to "1", and shifts to normal processing shown in FIG.

In step S1312, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 notifies the RAM abnormality and enters an infinite loop. For example, it is possible to issue a notification such as unconditionally turning on a predetermined lamp.

As shown in FIG. 20, in step S1401, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the start of normal processing. If 1 ms or more has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S1402, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1410.

In step S1402, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 performs lamp output processing. Specifically, the lamp is output in accordance with the variation pattern presentation of the decorative pattern (third pattern) on the third pattern display device 42 .

In step S1403, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs power-on notification. Specifically, the notification for 30 seconds by the power-on command is performed.

In step S1404, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs a customer waiting effect. Specifically, the title/still image is switched. That is, so-called demo screen display is performed.

In step S1405, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs a pending number display update process for the first symbol variation. Specifically, this pending number display update process is a process for performing a display corresponding to the pending lamp 40 c of the first symbol display device 40 also on the third symbol display device 42 .

In step S1406, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs frame button input monitoring/effect processing. Specifically, this frame button input monitoring/effect processing is performed by a pachinko game machine having frame buttons (for example, the upper selection button 71, the lower selection button 72, and the effect button 80 shown in FIG. 2) that can be pressed by the player. In the machine, it is for performing model-specific production by pressing the frame button. Therefore, this processing is unnecessary for a pachinko machine that does not have such frame buttons.

In step S1407, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs lamp editing processing. Specifically, a process of editing a lamp lighting pattern corresponding to (synchronized with) the variation pattern rendering of the decorative design on the third design display device 42 is performed.

In step S1408, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 performs sound editing/output processing. Specifically, a process of sounding a sound (outputting voice, music, effect sound, etc.) corresponding to (synchronizing with) the variation pattern presentation of the decorative design on the third design display device 42 is performed.

In step S1409, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs production execution management processing. Concretely, time management etc. are performed to synchronize lamps, sounds and liquid crystal effects (decorative pattern variation pattern effects on the third pattern display device 42).

In step S1410, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 performs a process of updating the random number value for determining the variation pattern of decorative symbols to be performed by the third symbol display device 42 and the effect of the sound lamp. Specifically, this random number takes a value from "0" to "32767", for example, and returns to "0" when it reaches the upper limit of "37268".

In step S1411, when the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 receives a command from the main controller 261, it performs processing corresponding to each command.

Specifically, when the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 receives a variation pattern designation command from the main controller 261 , it transmits a display command obtained by converting the variation pattern designation command to the display control device 45 . It should be noted that the variation pattern specification command may be directly output through. Further, when the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 receives a decorative design designation command from the main controller 261 , it transmits to the display control device 45 a stop display command obtained by command conversion of the decorative design designation command. In addition, in the command conversion of the decorative design designation command, if a notice command is generated in addition to the stop display command, the notice command is also transmitted to the display control device 45 . This advance notice command includes, for example, the presence or absence of the appearance of a school of fish as a notice. Further, when the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 receives an all-stop command (determined command) from the main controller 261 , the CPU 551 transmits this all-stop command to the display control device 45 as it is.

In step S1412, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs command output processing for outputting a command to the display control device 45 or the like. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 transmits various commands such as the aforementioned display command and stop display command to the display control device 45, for example.

In step S1413, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 determines whether or not the RAM of the sub-controller 262 has been destroyed. If the RAM has not been destroyed, the process returns to step S1401, and if it has been destroyed, an infinite loop is entered.

Here, frame button input monitoring/effect processing in step S1406 shown in FIG. 20 by the sub-controller 262 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22. FIG. FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing by the sub-controller 262 . FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing the performance button input monitoring and performance processing by the sub-controller 262. As shown in FIG.

The sub control device 262 performs frame button input monitoring processing, as shown in FIG. Specifically, first, in step S1501, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs selection button input monitoring/effect processing.

In step S1502, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs effect button input monitoring/effect processing, and terminates this processing.

<Production button input monitoring / production processing>
Here, the effect button input monitoring/effect processing will be described in detail with reference to the flow chart of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 22, in step S1700, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 monitors the input of the effect button 80 shown in FIG.

In step S1701, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the variation pattern includes a specific sound effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the game round is the game round including the first reach fluctuation pattern after 30×n (n=integer) game rounds. The reach fluctuation pattern may be various reach fluctuation patterns such as normal reach and super reach. This is to secure the time for performing the specific sound effect in the game round in which the specific sound effect is performed. If it is a game round including the first reach variation pattern after 30×n game rounds, the process proceeds to step S1702; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1713, which will be described later.

In step S1702, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not it is time to start the specific sound effect in the specific sound effect period. The specific sound effect start timing is determined such as after a predetermined second after the reach is established in the reach fluctuation pattern. If it is the specific sound effect start timing, the process proceeds to step S1703; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1708, which will be described later.

In step S1703, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the specific sound effect start flag to "1", and proceeds to step S1704. In step S1704, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 starts counting the specific sound effect period counter. The specific sound effect period is determined like a predetermined second during reach fluctuation.

In step S1705, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the production button 80 has been detected. If the effect button 80 is detected, the process proceeds to step S1707, otherwise the process ends. In step S1705, the affirmative determination is made only when the production button 80 is normally detected. For example, when the effect button 80 is repeatedly hit, only the detection of the first pressing is determined to be valid, and the detection of the subsequent pressing is determined to be invalid.

In step S1707, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the effect button detection flag to "1", and proceeds to step S1708. In step S1708, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 acquires time information (hereinafter referred to as button detection time information) of the specific sound effect period counter at the time when the effective pressing of the effect button 80 is detected.

In step S1709, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not it is time to end the specific sound effect. The specific sound effect end timing corresponds to the end point of the specific sound effect period. If it is the end timing of the specific sound effect, the process proceeds to step S1710; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1712, which will be described later.

In step S1710, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the specific sound effect start flag to "0", and proceeds to step S1711. In step S1711, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 ends the counting of the counter for the specific sound effect period.

In step S1712, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the specific sound effect start flag has already become "0" without waiting for the specific sound effect end timing. If the specific sound effect start flag is "0", the process proceeds to step S1711, otherwise the process ends.

In step S1713, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 proceeds to step S1714 if the game round at the time when the operation of the production button 80 is detected is the 300×nth (n: integer), otherwise, the main process. exit.

In step S1714, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the one-shot notification sound determination flag indicating that the timing for determining the pitch of the one-shot notification sound has arrived, to "1", and ends this process. The process of determining the one-shot notification sound will be described later.

Next, the effect execution management processing of step S1409 shown in FIG. 20 by the sub-control device 262 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 28. FIG. In addition, FIG. 5 is also referred to for the description of the flags used in the specific sound effect.

FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing effect execution management processing by the sub-controller 262. As shown in FIG. FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing the effect button effectiveness determination period setting process by the sub control device 262 . FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing specific sound output processing by the sub-controller 262 . FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing the opening/closing mode (jackpot) display setting process by the sub-controller 262 . FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the variable display mode setting process by the sub-controller 262. As shown in FIG. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing the one-shot notification sound determination process by the sub-controller 262. As shown in FIG.

<Specific sound hearing determination process>
As shown in FIG. 23, in step S1901, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs effect button validity determination period setting processing. This effect button validity determination period setting process will be described below with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 24, in step S2001, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the effect button detection flag described above in step S1707 is "1". If the production button detection flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S2002; otherwise, the process ends.

In step S2002, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the button detection time information acquired in step S1708 is within the first specific sound validity determination period described below. The first specific sound validity determination period is a period for detecting that the player has operated the production button 80 by listening to the first specific sound while the first specific sound is being output, and the first specific sound is being output. This is a period for validating the operation of the effect button 80 preset according to the period. The same applies to second and third specific sound validity determination periods, which will be described later. If the button detection time information is within the first specific sound validity determination period, the process proceeds to step S2003; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S2004.

In step S2003, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the first specific sound listening flag described below from "0" to "1", and sets the first specific sound listening frequency counter described below to "1". Add and proceed to step S2008. The first specific sound listening flag is provided in the RAM 553 of the sub-control device 262, and based on the operation of the effect button 80 during the first specific sound validity determination period, the audible frequency band that the player can hear is This is a flag for grasping that it is 19 kHz. The first specific sound listening frequency counter is provided in the RAM 553 of the sub-controller 262 and counts the number of times the player listens to the first specific sound. The same applies to second and third specific sound listening frequency counters, which will be described later.

At this time, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the first specific sound listening display flag indicating that the player was able to hear the first specific sound to "1", and sets the first specific sound listening display. set command. The first specific sound listening display flag is stored in the RAM 553 of the sub-controller 262 . The first specific sound listening display command is transmitted to the display control device 45 . The second and third specific sound listening display flags are similarly processed.

In step S2004, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the button detection time information is within the second specific sound validity determination period. If it is within the second specific sound validity determination period, the process proceeds to step S2005; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S2006. In step S2005, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the second specific sound listening flag from "0" to "1" and adds "1" to the second specific sound listening count counter. Proceed to S2008. The second specific sound listening flag is a flag for grasping that the audible frequency band that the player can hear is 17 kHz based on the operation of the effect button 80 during the second specific sound validity determination period. . Also, the second specific sound listening display flag is set to "1".

In step S2006, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the button detection time information is within the third specific sound validity determination period. If it is the third specific sound validity determination period, the process proceeds to step S2007. In step S2007, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the third specific sound listening flag from "0" to "1" and adds "1" to the third specific sound listening frequency counter. Proceed to S2008. Also, the third specific sound listening display flag is set to "1".

If the determination in step S2006 is negative, the button detection time information is not any of the first to third specific sound validity determination periods, so the process proceeds to step S2009, which will be described later. In this way, when the pressing of the effect button 80 is detected during the specific sound effect period other than the first to third specific sound validity determination periods, the detection of the pressing is treated as invalid. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player's age group is inaccurately grasped based on the random operation of the effect button 80 within the specific sound effect period.

The specific sound effect of this embodiment is terminated when the player presses the effect button 80 after listening to any one of the first to third specific sounds. Therefore, in step S2008, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 resets the specific sound effect start flag to "0" and proceeds to step S2009. In step S2009, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 resets the effect button detection flag to "0", and terminates this process.

The above-described first to third specific sound listening flags in the RAM 553 of the sub-controller 262 correspond to grasping means of the present invention. Also, the first to third specific sound listening display flags in the RAM 553 of the sub-controller 262 correspond to specific information display control means of the present invention.

<Selection button valid determination period setting process>
Returning to the effect execution processing shown in FIG. 23, in step S1902, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs selection button validity determination period setting processing. The selection button validity determination period setting process sets a period during which operation detection of the selection buttons 71 to 74 is valid.

<Specific sound output period setting process>
In step S1903, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs specific sound output period setting processing. This specific sound output processing will be described below with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 25, in step S2100, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the specific sound effect start flag is "1". If the specific sound effect start flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S2101 in order to start the specific sound effect, otherwise the process ends.

In step S2101, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 issues a specific sound effect display start command for controlling the display control device 45 to display the display necessary for starting the specific sound effect on the third pattern display device 42. set.

In step S2102, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the first specific sound output timing has arrived. If it is the first specific sound output timing, the process proceeds to step S2103; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S2110.

In step S2103, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a first specific sound output flag (described below) to "1" and sets a first specific sound output start command. The first specific sound output flag is provided in the RAM 553 of the sub-control device 262, and each time the 30×n-th game round arrives, only some players hear it within a specific sound effect period of a predetermined length. A flag for outputting a first specific sound having a possible frequency band of 19 kHz. The first specific sound output end command is transmitted to the sound output control device 47 .

In step S2104, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 adds or subtracts the timer for counting the first specific sound output period provided in the RAM 553 to count the first specific sound output period, and proceeds to step S2105.

In step S2105, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the timer value has reached zero. If the timer value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S2106, and if the timer value becomes 0, the process proceeds to step S2109.

In step S2106, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the first specific sound listening flag described in step S2003 is "1". If the first specific sound listening flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S2109; otherwise (if "0"), this process ends.

In step S2109, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262, based on the fact that the value of the timer that counts the first specific sound output period has become 0 or that the specific sound effect start flag has been set to "0", The first specific sound output flag is set to "0" and the first specific sound output end command is set. The first specific sound output end command is transmitted to the sound output control device 47 . This completes the processing.

In step S2110, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not it is the second specific sound output timing. If it is the second specific sound output timing, the process proceeds to step S2111; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S2119.

In step S2111, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the first specific sound listening flag is "1". If the first specific sound listening flag is "1", this process is terminated. If the first specific sound listening flag is not "1", the process proceeds to step S2112. In step S2112, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the second specific sound output flag to "1", sets the second specific sound output start command, and proceeds to step S2113. The second specific sound output start command is output to the audio output control device 47 .

In step S2113, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 adds or subtracts the timer for the second specific sound output period provided in the RAM 553 to count the second specific sound output period. In step S2114, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the timer value is zero. If the timer value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S2115. If the timer value is 0, the process proceeds to step S2118.

In step S2115, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the second specific sound listening flag described in step S2004 is "1". If the second specific sound listening flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S2118; otherwise (if "0"), this process ends.

In step S2118, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262, based on the fact that the value of the timer that counts the second specific sound output period has become 0, or that the specific sound effect start flag has been set to "0", The second specific sound output flag is set to "0" and the second specific sound output end command is set. The second specific sound output end command is transmitted to the audio output control device 47 . This completes the processing.

In step S2119, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not it is the third specific sound output timing. If it is the third specific sound output timing, the process proceeds to step S2120. If it is not the third specific sound output timing, this process is terminated.

In step S2120, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the second specific sound listening flag is set to "1". If the second specific sound listening flag is "1", this process is terminated. If the second specific sound listening flag is not "1", the process proceeds to step S2121.

In step S2121, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the third specific sound output flag to "1", sets the third specific sound output command, and proceeds to step S2122. The third specific sound output command is output to the audio output control device 47 .

In step S2122, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 adds or subtracts the third specific sound output period timer provided in the RAM 553 to count the third specific sound output period. In step S2123, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the timer value has reached zero. If the timer value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S2124. If the timer value becomes 0, the process proceeds to step S2127.

In step S2124, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the third specific sound listening flag described above in step S2006 is "1". If the third specific sound listening flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S2127; otherwise (if "0"), this process ends.

In step S2127, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the third specific sound output flag to "0" based on the fact that the specific sound effect start flag is set to "0", and also sets the output of the third specific sound to "0". set command. The third specific sound output end command is transmitted to the audio output control device 47 . This completes the entire process.

The first specific sound described above corresponds to the high frequency band specific sound of the invention, and the second specific sound and the third specific sound correspond to the low frequency band specific sound of the invention. The first to third specific sound output flags provided in the RAM 553 of the sub control device 262 described above correspond to specific sound output control means of the present invention.

<Open/close mode (jackpot) display setting process>
Returning to the effect execution processing shown in FIG. 23, in step S1904, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs opening/closing mode (jackpot) display setting processing. This opening/closing mode (jackpot) display setting process will be described below with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 26, in step S2201, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 proceeds to step S2202 if an opening command has been received, otherwise proceeds to step S2203.

In step S2202, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets a display opening command.

In step S2203, if the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 has received the ending command, the process proceeds to step S2204; otherwise, the process ends.

In step S2204, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a display ending command, and terminates this process.

<Variable display mode setting processing>
Returning to the effect execution processing shown in FIG. 23, in step S1905, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs variable display mode setting processing. This variable display mode setting process will be described below with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 27, in step S2301, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 proceeds to step S2302 if a variation pattern designation command has been received, and proceeds to step S2308 if not.

In step S2302, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the variation pattern designation command is a jackpot. If it is a jackpot, the process proceeds to step S2303, and if it is not a jackpot, the process proceeds to step S2307.

In step S2303, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs a one-shot notification lottery. The one-shot announcement lottery is a lottery to decide whether or not to output a specific sound to announce that, before the result of the variable display is displayed, when the result of the variable display is a big win. .

In step S2304, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the result of the one-shot notification lottery is to perform one-shot notification effect. If the one-shot notification effect is performed, the process proceeds to step S2305, and if the one-shot notification effect is not performed, the process proceeds to step S2307.

In step S2305, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the one-shot notification effect flag to "1". In step S2306, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a symbol row variation display command including a one-shot notification effect, and ends this processing.

In step S2307, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a display command for pattern row variation that does not include the one-shot notification effect, and ends this processing.

In step S2308, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 proceeds to step S2309 if the decorative design designation command is received, and terminates this process if not received.

In step S2309, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a stop display command based on the designated stop symbol, and terminates this process.

<One-shot notification sound determination processing>
Returning to the effect execution processing shown in FIG. 23, in step S1906, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs one-shot notification sound determination processing. This one-shot notification sound determination process will be described below using FIG.

As shown in FIG. 28, in step S2401, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether the one-shot notification sound decision flag is "1" (whether it is the 300×n-th (n: integer) game round). ) is determined. In this embodiment, every time the 300×n-th game cycle comes after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the one-shot notification sound determination process is performed. If it is the 300×n-th game round, the process proceeds to step S2402, otherwise the process ends.

In step S2402, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 reads out the one-shot notification sound determination table from the ROM 552. FIG. In steps S2403, S2406, and S2408, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 refers to the one-shot notification sound determination table and determines the pitch of the one-shot notification sound.

Here, the one-shot announcement sound determination table stored in the ROM 552 of the sub-controller 262 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 29(a) and 29(b) are diagrams showing a one-shot notification sound determination table stored by the sub-controller 262. FIG.

The one-shot notification sound determination table is stored in the ROM 552 of the sub-controller 262, and when the audible frequency band is grasped a predetermined number of times, the height of the mode of the audible frequency band grasped the predetermined number of times Based on this, the upper limit of the one-shot notification sound that is estimated to be audible to the player is determined, and the type of the one-shot notification sound is determined based on the determined upper limit of the one-shot notification sound.

The RAM 553 of the sub-controller 262 stores the grasped audible frequency band in a predetermined storage area. When determining the one-shot notification sound, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 reads the one-shot notification sound determination table stored in the ROM 552 and reads the audible frequency bands that have been grasped so far stored in the RAM 553 .

The pitch of the one-shot notification sound includes the first one-shot notification sound having the same 19 kHz frequency band as the first specific sound, the second one-shot notification sound having the same 17 kHz frequency band as the second specific sound, There is a third one-shot announcement sound having the same frequency band of 15 kHz as the third specific sound. As shown in FIG. 29(a), the upper limit height of the one-shot announcement sound is the number of times the specific sound that could be heard the most among the first to third specific sounds was heard (hereafter referred to as the highest number). The first condition is determined based on the number of listening times) and the second condition is determined based on the number of times the individual first to third specific sounds are heard, and is determined based on the upper limit of the one-shot notification sound pitch. The type of notification sound is determined.

First, the case where the first condition is that the maximum number of listening times is 9 or 10 will be described. That is, when the second condition is that the number of times the first specific sound is heard is 9 or 10 times, the upper limit pitch of the one-shot notification sound is determined to be the first one-shot notification sound (19 kHz). In this case, the one-shot announcement sound to be output is determined with a probability of 100% to be the first one-shot announcement sound. This is because it is presumed that the player who has heard the first specific sound with the highest frequency can easily hear the first announcement sound having the same pitch as the first specific sound.

Further, when the second condition is that the number of times the second specific sound is heard is 9 or 10 times, the upper limit pitch of the one-shot notification sound is determined to be the second one-shot notification sound (17 kHz). When the upper limit is determined to be the second one-shot announcement sound in the second condition described above, the one-shot announcement sound to be output is determined with a probability of 100% to be the second one-shot announcement sound.

Further, when the second condition is that the number of times the third specific sound is heard is 9 or 10 times, the upper limit pitch of the one-shot notification sound is determined to be the third one-shot notification sound (15 kHz). When the upper limit is determined to be the third one-shot announcement sound in the second condition described above, the one-shot announcement sound to be output is determined with a probability of 100% to be the third one-shot announcement sound.

Next, a case where the first condition is that the maximum number of listening times is 6 to 8 will be explained. That is, when the second condition is that the number of times the first specific sound is heard is 6 to 8 times, the upper limit pitch of the one-shot notification sound is determined to be the first one-shot notification sound (19 kHz). In this case, the output one-shot announcement sound is determined with a probability of 70% for the first one-shot announcement sound, 20% for the second one-shot announcement sound, and 10% for the third one-shot announcement sound. This is because a player who can hear the first specific sound can hear any of the first to third one-shot notification sounds.

Further, when the second condition is that the number of times the second specific sound is heard is 6 to 8 times, the upper limit pitch of the one-shot notification sound is determined to be the second one-shot notification sound (17 kHz). In this case, the output one-shot announcement sound is determined with a probability of 70% for the second one-shot announcement sound and 30% for the third one-shot announcement sound. When the second condition is that the number of times the third specific sound is heard is 6 to 8 times, the upper limit of the pitch of the one-shot notification sound is determined to be the third one-shot notification sound (15 kHz). In this case, the one-shot announcement sound to be output is determined with a probability of 100% to be the third one-shot announcement sound.

Next, a case where the first condition is that the maximum number of listening times is five will be described. That is, if the second condition is that the number of times the first specific sound is heard is 5 times (other than 4 times or less), the upper limit pitch of the one-shot notification sound is determined to be the first one-shot notification sound (19 kHz). . In this case, the output one-shot announcement sound is determined with a probability of 50% for the first one-shot announcement sound, 30% for the second one-shot announcement sound, and 20% for the third one-shot announcement sound. This is because it is presumed that it is difficult for the player to hear the first announcement sound compared to the player who has heard the first specific sound six to eight times.

In addition, when the second condition is that the number of times the second specific sound is heard is 5 times (other than 4 times), the upper limit of the pitch of the one-shot notification sound is determined to be the second one-shot notification sound (17 kHz). . In this case, the one-shot announcement sound to be output is determined with a probability of 50% for each of the second and third one-shot announcement sounds. Further, when the second condition is that the number of times the third specific sound is heard is 5, the upper limit pitch of the one-shot notification sound is determined to be the third one-shot notification sound (15 kHz). In this case, the one-shot announcement sound to be output is determined with a probability of 100% to be the third one-shot announcement sound.

Next, if the first condition is that the maximum number of listening times is 4 or less, the upper limit pitch of the one-shot notification sound is determined to be the third one-shot notification sound (15 kHz) with a probability of 100%. This is because it is presumed that such a player is not very interested in the specific sound effect.

In addition to the one-shot notification sound, the type of presentation other than the one-shot notification sound may be determined. For example, the type of music to be used in the game after the end of the jackpot round generated in the variable display including the one-shot notification sound may be determined, or the type of music used during the jackpot round generated in the variable display including the one-shot notification sound may determine the type of music played. Below, with reference to FIG.29(b), the example which determines the kind of music used after a jackpot round according to the method of determining a one-shot notification sound is demonstrated.

That is, the first one-shot notification sound (one-shot notification sound of the time before last) is determined based on the game of 1 to (300×1 times), and the first one-shot notification sound is determined based on the game of 301 to (300×2 times). When the notification sound (previous one-shot notification sound) is determined and the first one-shot notification sound (current one-shot notification sound) is determined based on the game of 601 to (300 × 3 times), that is, the second When the one-shot notification sound is determined three times in a row, the music to be used after the end of the jackpot round is determined as the "latest hit music". This is because the fact that the first notification sound is determined three times in succession means that there is a high possibility that the player is in his or her early twenties who can easily hear the first notification sound. be.

Similarly, when the second one-shot notification sound is determined three times in succession, the song to be used after the end of the current jackpot round is determined to be the "slightly previous hit song". This is because the fact that the second one-shot announcement sound is determined three times in a row means that players in their late 20s to 30s who are more likely to hear the second one-shot announcement sound may be playing the game. because it is expensive.

Similarly, when the third one-shot announcement sound is determined three times in succession, the song to be used after the end of the current jackpot round is determined to be the "old hit song". This is because the fact that the third one-shot notification sound is determined three times in a row means that there is a high possibility that players in their 40s or older who can hear the third one-shot notification sound are playing the game. is.

Next, after the music to be used after the end of the jackpot round is determined as the "latest hit song" based on the 1st to 900th games, the second one is played based on the 901st to (300×4 times) games. The notification sound is determined, the second one-shot notification sound is determined based on the game from 1201 to (300 x 5 times), and the second one-shot notification sound is determined based on the game from 1501 to (300 x 6 times) In other words, after the first one-shot announcement sound is determined three times in a row, if the second one-shot announcement sound is determined three times in a row, the song used after the end of the jackpot round is "a little Previous hit song" is decided. This is because the players in their early twenties who were playing the game when the previous "latest hit song" was determined finished the game, and the players in their late twenties to thirties started playing the game. This is because there is a high possibility that

Similarly, if the first one-shot notification sound is determined three times in a row, and then the third one-shot notification sound is determined three times in a row, the song used after the jackpot round ends will be the "old hits". song”. It is possible that players in their early 20s who were playing when the previous "latest hit song" was determined have finished playing, and players in their 40s and older are playing games. is high.

Also, after the first notification sound is determined three times in a row, if the first notification sound, the second notification sound, and the third notification sound are determined, after the jackpot round ends is determined to be an "all-time hit song". The "all-time hits" are hits including "recent hits", "shorter hits", and "older hits". It is not possible to determine whether the reason for the irregular pitch of the one-shot notification sound to be determined is that the player has changed, or that the player has lost interest in the specific sound effect. It is from.

Also, the "all-time hit song" may be determined when the pitch of the one-shot notification sound determined based on 1 to 900 games is irregular. Also, after the "all-time hit song" is determined, the height of the one-shot notification sound determined based on the next 901 to 1800 games is the same height (for example, the first one-shot notification sound) and 3 If it is consecutive times, the "recent hits" may be determined. This is because it was not possible to determine what kind of players were playing in the games played 1 to 900 times, but it was possible to determine that players in their early twenties were playing in the games played 901 to 1800 times. be.

In addition to the "recent hits", "short-term hits", and "old hits", the image of the singer may be displayed on the third pattern display device 42 as a changing background. The combined image video may be displayed on the third pattern display device 42 as a changing background. Further, when it is determined that the player has changed, an image based on the change of the player may be displayed on the third symbol display device 42 . For example, when the ``recent hit song'' is changed to the ``hit song from a while ago'', an image such as ``time slip in the xx era'' is displayed as the third pattern when the normal game starts after the end of the jackpot round. A device 42 may be used.

The one-shot notification sound determination table stored in the ROM 552 of the sub-controller 262 described above corresponds to the specific notification sound determination means of the invention according to (A7).

Return to FIG. In step S2403, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the condition for setting the upper limit of the one-shot notification sound to the first one-shot notification sound is established. If the condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S2404, and if the condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S2405.

In step S2404, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the flag of any one of the first to third one-shot announcement sounds to "1" and outputs the corresponding first to third one-shot announcement sound output start commands. set either. The first to third one-shot notification sound flags are provided in the RAM 553 of the sub-control device 262, and when the variation display result is a jackpot result, the high frequency band of the audible frequency band grasped by the first specific sound listening flag It is a flag for outputting the first to third announcement sounds of a height (19 kHz to 15 kHz) that can be heard by a player having this audible frequency band according to the height (19 kHz). The first to third one-shot announcement sound output start commands are output to the voice output control device 47 .

In step S2405, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the condition for setting the upper limit of the one-shot notification sound to the second one-shot notification sound is established. If the condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S2406, and if the condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S2407.

In step S2406, the flag of either the second or third one-shot notification sound is set to "1", and either the corresponding second or third one-shot notification sound output start command is set. The second and third one-shot announcement sound output start commands are output to the voice output control device 47 . The second and third one-shot notification sound flags are set according to the height of the audible frequency band (17 kHz) grasped by the second specific sound listening flag when the variation display result is a jackpot result. is a flag for outputting the second and third one-shot notification sounds of a height (17 kHz to 15 kHz) that can be heard by the player.

In step S2407, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the condition for setting the upper limit of the one-shot notification sound to the third one-shot notification sound is satisfied. If the condition is established, the process advances to step S2408, and if the condition is not established, the process ends.

In step S2408, the third one-shot announcement sound flag is set to "1" and the third one-shot announcement sound output start command is set. The command to start outputting the third first announcement sound is output to the voice output control device 47 . The third one-shot notification sound flag has a height (15 kHz) corresponding to the height (15 kHz) of the audible frequency band grasped by the third specific sound listening flag when the variation display result is a jackpot result. A flag for outputting a one-shot notification sound.

The above-described first to third one-shot notification sounds correspond to the specific notification sounds of the invention according to (A6), and the first to third one-shot notification sound flags provided in the RAM 553 of the sub control device 262 described above corresponds to the specific sound notification means of the invention according to (A6).

Returning to the effect execution processing shown in FIG. 23, in step S1907, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs one-shot notification effect processing. This one-shot notification effect processing will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing the one-shot notification effect processing by the sub-control device 262. As shown in FIG.

In step S2501, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the one-shot notification flag is "1". If the one-shot notification flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S2502 in order to perform the one-shot notification effect, otherwise the process ends.

In step S2502, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the first one-shot notification sound flag is "1". If the first notification sound flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S2503; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S2505.

In step S2503, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not a predetermined one-shot notification timing has come. If it is the one-shot announcement timing, the process proceeds to step S2504; otherwise, the process ends.

In step S2504, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a first-shot notification sound output start command, and proceeds to step S2505. The first announcement sound output start command is output to the sound output control device 47 .

In step S2505, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 adds or subtracts from the timer provided in the RAM 553 to count the one-shot notification sound output period, and proceeds to step S2506. In step S2506, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the timer value has reached zero. If the timer value becomes 0, the process advances to step S2507; otherwise, the process ends.

In step S2507, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the first one-shot notification sound output flag to "0", sets the first first-shot notification sound output end command, and terminates this process. The first announcement sound output end command is output to the sound output control device 47 .

In step S2508, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the second one-shot notification sound flag is "1". If the second one-shot notification sound flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S2509; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S2514.

In step S2509, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the predetermined one-shot notification timing has come. This one-shot notification timing is the same as the timing of step S2503 described above. If it is the one-shot announcement timing, the process proceeds to step S2510; otherwise, the process ends.

In step S2510, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a second one-shot notification sound output start command, and proceeds to step S2511. The second one-shot notification sound output start command is output to the sound output control device 47 .

In step S2511, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 adds or subtracts the timer provided in the RAM 553 to count the one-shot announcement sound output period, and proceeds to step S2512. In step S2512, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the timer value has reached zero. If the timer value becomes 0, the process advances to step S2513; otherwise, the process ends.

In step S2513, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the second one-shot announcement sound output flag to "0", sets the second one-shot announcement sound output end command, and ends this process. The second one-shot announcement sound output end command is output to the voice output control device 47 .

In step S2514, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the third one-shot notification sound flag is "1". If the third one-shot notification sound flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S2515; otherwise, the process ends.

In step S2515, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the predetermined one-shot notification timing has come. This one-shot notification timing is the same as the timing of step S2503 described above. If it is the one-shot announcement timing, the process proceeds to step S2516; otherwise, the process ends.

In step S2516, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a third one-shot notification sound output start command, and proceeds to step S2517. The second one-shot notification sound output start command is output to the sound output control device 47 .

In step S2517, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 adds or subtracts from the timer provided in the RAM 553 to count the one-shot notification sound output period, and proceeds to step S2518. In step S2518, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the timer value has reached zero. If the timer value becomes 0, the process proceeds to step S2519; otherwise, the process ends.

In step S2519, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the second one-shot announcement sound output flag to "0", sets the second one-shot announcement sound output end command, and ends this process. The second one-shot announcement sound output end command is output to the voice output control device 47 .

Next, normal processing of the display control device 45 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31(a) is a flow chart showing normal processing of the display control device, and FIG. 31(b) is a flow chart showing switching processing such as display mode by the display control device.

As shown in FIG. 31A, in step S3001, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs command input processing for inputting various commands transmitted from the sub-control device 262, and proceeds to step S3002. The various commands include, for example, a display command, a stop display command, a display opening command, a display ending command, a demonstration start command, and a symbol row variation start command.

In step S3002, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs switching processing of the display mode, etc. (display of pattern row variation, jackpot opening, jackpot ending, etc.), and proceeds to step S3003. Here, the switching processing of this display mode etc. is demonstrated using FIG.31(b).

As shown in FIG. 31(b), in step S3101, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not a specific sound effect start command has been received. If the specific sound effect start command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3102; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3103.

In step S3102, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 starts displaying a specific sound effect. Specifically, the display control device 45 controls the display of the third symbol display device 42 so as to display information necessary for the specific sound effect. Information necessary for the specific sound effect will be described later.

In step S3103, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not any one of the first specific sound effect command, the second specific sound listening display command, and the third specific sound listening display command is received. In step S3104, if the display control device 42 receives the first to third specific sound listening display commands, the display control device 42 displays different results according to the height of the frequency band of the specific sound that the player could hear. I do. Different result displays will be described later.

In step S3105, if the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 has received the symbol row variation start command, the process proceeds to step S3106; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3107.

In step S3106, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 starts pattern row variation. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, the display control device 45 starts varying the main decorative design SZ and the sub-decorative design FZ of the three decorative design rows L, M, and R.

In step S3109, if the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 has received the display opening command, the process proceeds to step S3110; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3111. In step S3110, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 controls the display of the third symbol display device 42 so as to start displaying the opening of the jackpot.

In step S3111, if the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 has received the display ending command, the process proceeds to step S3112, otherwise the process ends. In step S3112, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 controls the display of the third symbol display device 42 so as to start displaying a jackpot ending.

Returning to FIG. 31(a), in step S3003, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines a stop symbol, and proceeds to step S3004.

In step S3004, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines the variable display mode, and proceeds to step S3005.

In step S3005, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines an auxiliary effect (such as a message to be provided and displayed to the player), and proceeds to step S3006.

In step S<b>3006 , the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs display image control of the third symbol display device 42 .

For example, in the symbol row variation, the display control device 45 finally stops the symbol variation display of the main decorative symbol SZ and the secondary decorative symbol SZ in each of the decorative symbol rows L, M, and R, as shown in FIG. The display of the third pattern display device 42 is controlled so as to perform the variable display to be displayed.

In step S3007, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs other processing (demonstration, pending display, etc.).

In step S3008, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the start of normal processing. If 1 ms or more has elapsed, the process returns to step S3001, and if not, the process returns to step S3008.

Next, normal sound output processing and specific sound/one-shot announcement sound output processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32(a) is a flow chart showing normal voice output processing, and (b) is a flow chart showing specific sound/one-shot announcement sound output processing.

As shown in FIG. 32(a), in step S3151, the CPU 561 of the audio output control device 47 determines whether or not the normal audio output command has been received from the sub control device 262. The normal voice output command is a command for designating a voice to be output in accordance with the progress of the game, such as a variable display effect on the third symbol display device 42 or an effect during the jackpot round. If the normal voice output command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3152; otherwise, the process ends.

In step S3152, the CPU 561 of the voice output control device 47 specifies sound data based on the song number of the melody specified by the normal voice output command. Next, in step S3153, the CPU 561 of the audio output control device 47 determines the amplification amount when amplifying the analog sound data by the amplifier, based on the set value of the sound volume switch.

Next, in step S3154, the CPU 561 of the audio output control device 47 reads from the ROM 562 digital sound data corresponding to the song number specified in step S3152. Next, in step S3155, the CPU 561 of the audio output control device 47 converts the read sound data of normal voice in digital format into sound data in analog format.

Next, in step S3156, the CPU 561 of the audio output control device 47 outputs analog sound data to the sound output unit 24a for normal sound. Specifically, in the sound output unit 24a, the amplifier 24a1 amplifies analog sound data according to the amplification value determined in step S3153, and the speaker 24a2 outputs the amplified sound data as a melody that the player can hear. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 32(b), in step S3161, the CPU 561 of the voice output control device 47 determines whether it has received a specific sound output start command or a one-shot announcement sound output start command from the sub-control device 262. judge. The specific sound output start command is a command for starting output of the first to third specific sounds. The one-shot announcement sound output start command is a command for starting the output of one-shot announcement sound. If the command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3162; otherwise, the process ends.

In step S3162, the CPU 561 of the audio output control device 47 designates the sound data of the first to third specific sounds to be output based on the designation by the specific sound output command. Next, in step S3163, the CPU 561 of the audio output control device 47 determines the amplification amount when amplifying the analog sound data by the amplifier, based on the set value of the sound volume switch.

Next, in step S3164, the CPU 561 of the voice output control device 47 prevents the specific sound or the one-shot announcement sound from being mixed with the normal voice and becoming difficult to hear when outputting the specific sound or the one-shot announcement sound. Also, change (decrease) the amount of amplification for normal audio.

Next, in step S3165, the CPU 561 of the audio output control device 47 reads from the ROM 562 sound data of the first to third specific sounds designated in step S3162. Next, in step S3166, the CPU 561 of the audio output control device 47 converts the sound data of the read digital format specific sound into analog format sound data.

Next, in step S3167, the CPU 561 of the audio output control device 47 outputs analog sound data to the sound output section 24b for the specific sound. Specifically, the amplifier 24a1 amplifies the analog audio data according to the amplification value determined in step S3163, and the speaker 24b2 outputs the amplified audio data to the sound output unit 24b as the first to third specific data. output as sound.

Next, in step S3168, the CPU 561 of the audio output control device 47 determines whether or not the specific sound output end command or the one-shot notification sound output end command has been received from the sub-control device 262 or not. The specific sound output end command is issued when the first to third specific sound output periods end or when the effect button 80 is detected during the first to third specific sound output periods. This is the command to end the output of The one-shot announcement sound output end command is a command for ending the output of the one-shot announcement sound when the output period of the one-shot announcement sound has ended. If the command has been received, the process advances to step S3169; otherwise, the process ends.

In step S3169, the CPU 561 of the voice output control device 47 returns the normal voice amplification amount changed (decreased) in step S3164 to the original amplification amount, Allow normal audio to be output as it was originally.
<Example of specific sound effect and one-shot notification effect>

Next, an example of the specific sound effect and the one-shot notification effect will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 33(a), the specific sound effect is performed every 30×n games. Also, every 300×n-th game round, one-shot notification sound is determined based on the audible frequency band grasped by the specific sound effect up to that point. Note that a predetermined one-shot notification sound may be used until the first one-shot notification sound is determined. As shown in FIG. 33(b), the specific sound effect period is 6 seconds after the start of the reach effect during each variable display (may be at the same time as the start of the reach or 5 seconds after the start of the reach). is set. In the specific sound production period, the first specific sound (19 kHz) → second specific sound (17 kHz) → third specific sound (15 kHz) is performed so that the time that can be audibly recognized for the first time differs according to the attributes of the player. A changing specific sound is output from the sound output unit 24 . The first to third specific sound output enabled periods in which the first to third specific sounds can be output are set to 0 seconds to 2 seconds after the start of the first specific sound output enabled period, and the second specific sound is output. The possible period is set to 2 seconds to 4 seconds after the start, and the third specific sound output possible period is set to 4 seconds to 6 seconds after the start. It is possible to change the timing and duration of outputting the first to third specific sounds within the first to third specific sound output enabled periods. In this embodiment, the first specific sound output period is set from 0 seconds to 1 second after the start of the specific sound effect period, and the second specific sound output period is set from 3 seconds to 4 seconds after the start of the specific sound effect period. Seconds later, the third specific sound output period is set 4 to 5 seconds after the start of the specific sound production period.

In the variable display of the 300×n-th game round, for example, two seconds before the start of the specific sound effect, the information necessary for the specific sound effect, for example, "Press the button when you hear a whining sound" shown in FIG. Press it!" to indicate the start of the specific sound effect, an image explaining how to operate the effect button 80 in the specific sound effect, an image notifying that the specific sound effect is being executed, etc. necessary for the specific sound effect. information is displayed on the third pattern display device 42 by the display control device 45 . Instead of displaying such an image, the effect button 80 incorporates an LED, and by lighting this LED during the specific sound effect period, the player is notified that the specific sound effect period is in progress. good too.

When the first specific sound output period is reached, the first specific sound (19 kHz) is output from the sound output section 24 . The first specific sound tends to be easily heard by players up to early twenties among players in the age group capable of playing games. When the effect button 80 is pressed during the validity determination period of the first specific sound, the sub-control device 262 grasps that the audible frequency band of the player is 19 kHz. By reading this audible frequency band, the gaming machine maker can understand that the age group of the players who play games on the gaming machine is likely to be in their early twenties. At this time, the third symbol display device 42 displays a first specific sound listening image (for example, "I think I heard up to 19 kHz. Awesome! Awesome!") to inform the result that the player was able to hear the first specific sound. , or a character image such as "You're a superhuman.") are displayed, so that the player can grasp the audible frequency band while attracting the player's interest.

When the player cannot hear the first specific sound during the first specific sound output period, the second specific sound (17 kHz) is output from the sound output section 24 during the second specific sound output period. Sounds having a frequency band of 17 kHz tend to be easily audible by players up to their thirties among those in the age group capable of playing games. When the effect button 80 is pressed during the second specific sound validity determination period, the sub-control device 262 grasps that the audible frequency band of the player is 17 kHz. By reading this audible frequency band, the gaming machine maker can grasp that the age group of the players who play games on the gaming machine is likely to be in the late twenties to thirties. At this time, the third symbol display device 42 displays a second specific sound listening image (for example, "I heard up to 17 kHz. Great!" or " A character image such as "You're almost superhuman.") is displayed, so that the player can grasp the audible frequency band while attracting the player's interest.

When the player cannot hear the second specific sound during the second specific sound output period, the third specific sound (15 kHz) is output from the sound output section 24 . Sounds having a frequency band of 15 kHz tend to be easily audible to players in their 40s and older among players in the age group capable of playing games. When the effect button 80 is pressed during the third specific sound validity determination period, the sub-control device 262 grasps that the player's audible frequency band is 15 kHz. By reading this audible frequency band, the gaming machine maker can grasp that the age group of the players who play games on the gaming machine is likely to be in their 40s or older. At this time, the third symbol display device 42 displays a second specific sound listening image (for example, "I think I heard up to 15 kHz" or "You A character image such as "You're still normal.") is displayed, so that the player can grasp the audible frequency band while attracting the player's interest.

The specific sound effect is performed every 30×n-th game, and the mode of the audible frequency band grasped by a certain number (for example, 10 times from 30 to 300) every 300×n-th game. , the pitch of the one-shot notification sound is determined. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33(c), assuming that the mode is in the frequency band of 19 kHz, the one-shot notification sound having the same pitch as the first specific sound (the first one-shot notification sound ) has been determined. In the one-shot announcement effect, the first one-shot announcement sound having a frequency band of 19 kHz is output from the sound output unit 24 for, for example, two seconds. Players in their late teens and later do not notice the first notification sound, and only players in their early twenties who play games with the game machine notice the first notification sound. Therefore, only players in their early twenties playing games on the gaming machine can be quietly notified of the winning of the jackpot. In this way, by reflecting the unique circumstances (age group) of the player who plays the game machine in the one-shot announcement effect, the one-shot announcement effect is better than the conventional one-shot announcement effect that anyone can understand. Interest can be improved.

The first to third specific sound listening images described above correspond to the specific information of the present invention.
<Effect of Example 1>

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, if the effect button 80 can be pressed during the first to third specific sound validity determination period, the third symbol display device 42 can 19 kHz, 2nd specific sound: 17 kHz, 3rd specific sound: 15 kHz). It is possible to acquire information for grasping the age group of a person. Since the audible frequency band is higher the lower the age group of the player is, and lower the higher the age group of the player, the gaming machine maker can grasp the first to third specific sound listening flags in the RAM 553 of the sub control device 262. By reading out the audible frequency band, the age group of the players playing the pachinko machine 10 to be investigated can be suitably investigated.

Example 2 is an example of the invention described in (B system) described later.
The pachinko machine 10 of Example 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 37. FIG. FIG. 34 is a main part of a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the second embodiment. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing specific sound output processing by the sub-controller 262 according to the second embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing switching processing of the display mode and the like by the display control device 45 of the second embodiment. FIG. 37 is a diagram for explaining the reach promotion effect.

Points of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment different from those of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

The sub-control device 262 of this embodiment does not have the first, second, and third one-shot notification flags provided in the first embodiment, but instead has a specific Based on the fact that the audible frequency band is grasped by the sound effect, it is determined which of the ready-to-reach promotion effects A, B, and C is to be used as the effect mode of the reach-level promotion effect to be executed during the subsequent variable display of the third pattern. The first, second, and third ready-to-win promotion effect flags for controlling to display the ready-to-win promotion effect on the third symbol display device 42 in the determined effect mode are different from the first embodiment. different. The first, second, and third reach promotion effect flags will be described later in detail.

The production button input monitoring/production processing shown in FIG. 22 and the production execution management processing shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the variation pattern with the specific sound effect corresponding to step S1701 is a variation pattern command including the ready-to-reach promotion effect, and a variation having a length necessary for executing the specific sound effect and the ready-to-reach promotion effect. It is a pattern command. In the specific sound listening determination process shown in FIG. 24, the step of counting the number of times the specific sound is heard is read as the step of setting the above-described first to third reach promotion effect flags to "1". The specific sound output period setting process shown in FIG. 25 is performed as follows according to this embodiment.

<Specific sound output period setting process>
The specific sound output period setting process performed by the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S3201, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the specific sound effect start flag is "1". If the specific sound effect start flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S3202 in order to start the specific sound effect, otherwise the process ends.

In step S3202, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 issues a specific sound effect display start command for controlling the display control device 45 to display the display necessary for starting the specific sound effect on the third symbol display device 42. set.

In step S3203, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the first specific sound output timing has arrived. If it is the first specific sound output timing, the process proceeds to step S3204; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3210.

In step S3204, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the first specific sound output flag to "1", sets the first specific sound output start command, and proceeds to step S3205. The first specific sound output end command is transmitted to the sound output control device 47 .

In step S3205, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 subtracts the timer to count the output period during which the first specific sound is output. In step S3206, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the timer value has reached zero. If the timer value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S3207, and if the timer value becomes 0, the process proceeds to step S3209, which will be described later.

In step S3207, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the first specific sound listening flag described in step S2003 of FIG. 24 is "1". If the first specific sound listening flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S3209; otherwise (if "0"), this process ends.

When the first reach promotion effect flag is "1", the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the first reach promotion effect display command. The first reach promotion effect display command is transmitted to the display control device 45 .

In step S3209, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the first specific sound output flag to "0" and sets the first specific sound output end command. The first specific sound output end command is transmitted to the sound output control device 47 . This completes the processing.

In step S3210, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the second specific sound output timing has arrived. If it is the second specific sound output timing, the process proceeds to step S3211; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3218.

In step S3211, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the first specific sound listening flag is "1". If the first specific sound listening flag is "1", this process is terminated. If the first specific sound listening flag is not "1", the process proceeds to step S3212. In step S3212, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the second specific sound output flag to "1", sets the second specific sound output start command, and proceeds to step S3213. The second specific sound output start command is output to the audio output control device 47 .

In step S3213, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 decrements the timer to count the output period of the second specific sound. In step S3214, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the timer value is zero. If the timer value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S3215. If the timer value is 0, the process proceeds to step S3217, which will be described later.

In step S3215, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the second specific sound listening flag described above in step S2005 of FIG. 24 is "1". If the second specific sound listening flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S3217; otherwise (if "0"), this process ends.

When the second reach promotion effect flag is "1", the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets a second reach promotion effect display command. The second reach promotion effect display command is transmitted to the display control device 45 .

In step S3217, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the second specific sound output flag to "0" and sets the second specific sound output end command. The second specific sound output end command is transmitted to the audio output control device 47 . This completes the processing.

In step S3218, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the third specific sound output timing has arrived. If it is the third specific sound output timing, the process proceeds to step S3219. If it is not the third specific sound output timing, this process is terminated.

In step S3219, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the second specific sound listening flag is set to "1". If the second specific sound listening flag is "1", this process is terminated. If the second specific sound listening flag is not "1", the process proceeds to step S3220. In step S3220, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the third specific sound output flag to "1", sets the third specific sound output start command, and proceeds to step S3221. The third specific sound output start command is output to the audio output control device 47 .

In step S3221, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 decrements the timer to count the output period of the third specific sound. In step S3222, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the timer value has reached zero. If the timer value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S3223. If the timer value becomes 0, the process proceeds to step S3225, which will be described later.

In step S3223, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the third specific sound listening flag described in step S2007 of FIG. 24 is "1". If the third specific sound listening flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S3225; otherwise (if "0"), this process ends.

When the third reach promotion effect flag is "1", the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets a third reach promotion effect display command. The third reach promotion effect display command is transmitted to the display control device 45 .

In step S3225, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the third specific sound output flag to "0" and sets the third specific sound output end command. The third specific sound output end command is transmitted to the audio output control device 47 . This completes the processing.

<Display mode switching processing>
Display mode switching processing performed by the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 will be described with reference to FIG. Since steps S3301, 3302, S3309 to S3312 are the same as steps SS3301, 3302, 3109 to S3112 of the first embodiment, reference is made to the first embodiment.

In step S3303, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the first reach promotion effect display command has been received. If the first reach promotion effect display command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3304; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3305.

In step S3304, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 controls the display of the third symbol display device 42 so as to start the reach promotion effect A. In the ready-to-win promotion effect A, when the ready-to-win display by the third pattern performed by the third pattern display device 42 is the ready-to-win by the normal pattern (“2”, “4”, “6” or “8”), the normal pattern is displayed. While the ready-to-win display is promoted to the ready-to-win display by the probability variable patterns (“1”, “3”, “5”, “7” or “9”), three different ready-to-win effects are sandwiched.

In step S3305, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the second reach promotion effect display command has been received. If the second reach promotion effect display command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3306; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3307.

In step S3306, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 controls the display of the third symbol display device 42 so as to start the ready-to-win promotion effect B. The ready-to-win promotion performance B is a promotion performance in which two different ready-to-win performance displays are sandwiched between the ready-to-reach display by the normal pattern to the ready-to-win display by the variable probability pattern.

In step S3307, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the third reach promotion effect display command has been received. If the third reach promotion effect display command is received, the process proceeds to step S3308, otherwise the process proceeds to step S3309.

In step S3308, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 controls the display of the third symbol display device 42 so as to start the ready-to-win promotion effect C. The ready-to-win promotion performance C is a promotion performance in which one different ready-to-win performance display is sandwiched between the ready-to-win display by the normal pattern to the ready-to-win display by the variable probability pattern.

<Example of reach promotion production>
An example of reach promotion effects A to C will be described with reference to FIG.

In this example, the variable display time including reach promotion effects A to C is set to 36 seconds, and the fixed display time is set to 2 seconds. The ready-to-win effect period is set from 4 seconds to 36 seconds after the fluctuation starts. Among them, the ready-to-win performance period by normal patterns is set to 4 seconds to 30 seconds after the start of fluctuation, and the ready-to-win performance period by probability variable patterns is set to 30 seconds to 36 seconds after the start of fluctuation.

The specific sound effect period is set from 6 seconds to 24 seconds after the fluctuation starts. The period during which the first specific sound (19 kHz) can be output (hereinafter referred to as the first specific sound output possible period; the second and third specific sounds are also referred to in the same way) is 6 seconds to 12 seconds after the start of fluctuation The 2nd specific sound (17 kHz) output period is set to 12 seconds to 18 seconds after the start of fluctuation, and the 3rd specific sound (15 kHz) output period is set to 18 seconds to 24 seconds after the start of fluctuation. be.

The first specific sound output period is set for 2 seconds in the first specific sound output enabled period, that is, 8 seconds to 10 seconds after the fluctuation starts. The second specific sound output period is set for two seconds in the second specific sound output enabled period, that is, 12 seconds to 14 seconds after the fluctuation starts. The third specific sound output period is set for two seconds in the third specific sound output enabled period, that is, 20 seconds to 22 seconds after the fluctuation starts.

When the pressing of the effect button 80 is detected at timing t1 (9 seconds after the start of fluctuation) during the first specific sound output period, reach promotion effect A is started. In the ready-to-win promotion performance A, a normal ready-to-win performance is displayed to expect a normal jackpot to occur until the first specific sound output possible period elapses. In addition, since the first specific sound is heard in the reach promotion effect A, the second and third specific sounds are not output during the second and third specific sound output periods in the following description.

In the reach promotion effect A, at the timing when the first specific sound output possible period ends (12 seconds after the start of fluctuation), the normal reach effect is changed to the super reach effect (normal pattern reach), which is more expected than the normal reach effect. be. The super reach effect is displayed until the end of the second specific sound output period (18 seconds after the start of fluctuation), and at the end of the second specific sound output period, the expectation level is higher than the super reach effect. And it is changed to a (rare) premium reach production (normal pattern reach) with a lower appearance rate than the super reach production. The premium ready-to-win effect is displayed until the timing when the third specific sound output possible period ends (24 seconds after the fluctuation starts), and at the timing when the third specific sound output possible period ends, pressing the effect button 80 is requested. Reach production with button chance (normal pattern reach) is changed.

The ready-to-win performance with push button chance is performed when a predetermined time elapses regardless of whether the performance button 80 is pressed during the ready-to-win performance period or the performance button 80 is not pressed during the ready-to-win performance period. (After 30 seconds from the start of fluctuation), it ends. In the ready-to-win production with push button chance, when a predetermined time (after 30 seconds from the start of variation) elapses, normal pattern ready-to-win is promoted to definite variable design ready-to-win. After that, after a fixed display time of 2 seconds, the same pattern as the probability variable ready-to-win pattern becomes a stop pattern, and the probability variable big hit is confirmed.

In this way, in the ready-to-reach promotion performance A, the player can see all the ready-to-reach promotion performances because the normal ready-to-reach performance→super ready-to-reach performance→premium ready-to-win performance→reach-to-reach performance with push button chance. By making the premium ready-to-win effect a high probability (for example, a probability close to 90%) that the big win display result will be displayed, the players can stage their expectations for the big win display result through the promotion from the normal ready-to-win effect to the super ready-to-win effect. It is possible to further increase the expectation of the big hit display result in the premium reach production while increasing the target.

When the depression of the effect button 80 is detected at timing t2 (13 seconds after the start of fluctuation) during the second specific sound output period, reach promotion effect B is started. In the reach promotion effect B, the normal reach effect is displayed until the second specific sound output possible period elapses. In the ready-to-reach promotion effect B, since the second specific sound is heard, the third specific sound is not output during the third specific sound output enabled period.

In the ready-to-reach promotion effect B, the normal ready-to-reach effect is changed to the super ready-to-win effect at the timing when the second specific sound output possible period ends (18 seconds after the fluctuation starts). The super ready-to-win performance is displayed until the timing when the third specific sound output possible period ends, and is changed to the ready-to-reach performance with push button chance at the timing when the third specific sound output period ends. In the ready-to-win performance with push button chance, when the performance button 80 is pressed and a predetermined time elapses, normal symbol ready-to-win is promoted to definite variable symbol ready-to-win. After that, the same symbol as the probability variable reach symbol becomes the stop symbol, and the probability variable big hit is decided.

In this way, in the ready-to-win promotion performance B that is started based on the listening of the second specific sound, the player changes from the normal ready-to-win effect → super ready-to-win effect to the ready-to-win effect with push button chance, but the premium ready-to-win effect. can't see In addition, in the case of super reach production, the probability that there will be both a big hit display result and a loss display result (for example, a probability of about 50%) is set, so that in the case of super reach production, if there is a big hit display result It is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation that even if the display results are not the same, the display result is the same.

When the depression of the effect button 80 is detected at timing t3 (21 seconds after the start of fluctuation) during the third specific sound output period, the ready-to-win promotion effect C is started. In the reach promotion effect C, the normal reach effect is displayed until the third specific sound output possible period elapses. When the third ready-to-reach promotion effect display command is received, the ready-to-reach promotion effect C is started at the timing when the third specific sound output period ends (ready-to-reach effect with push button chance).

In the ready-to-win promotion effect C, the ready-to-reach effect with a push button chance is started at the timing when the third specific sound output possible period ends (24 seconds after the start of fluctuation). In the ready-to-win performance with push button chance, when the performance button 80 is pressed and a predetermined time elapses, normal symbol ready-to-win is promoted to definite variable symbol ready-to-win. After that, the same symbol as the probability variable reach symbol becomes the stop symbol, and the probability variable big hit is decided.

In this way, in the ready-to-win promotion performance C that is started based on the listening of the third specific sound, the normal ready-to-win effect changes to the ready-to-reach effect with push button chance, but the player can choose between the super ready-to-win effect and the premium ready-to-win effect. can't see In the ready-to-win performance with a push button chance in the ready-to-reach promotion performance C, more displays are displayed in the case of a losing display result than in the case of a big win display result. It is possible to give the impression that the expectation of the big win display result is low compared to the ready-to-win performance with a push button chance in the promotions A and B. In such an impression, if a big win display result is obtained, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the player who can hear the specific sound having a higher frequency band can see the ready-to-win promotion effect with a higher number of promotions.

Incidentally, the ready-to-win promotion effects A to C described above correspond to the specific display effects of the invention according to (B1). Further, the first to third reach promotion effect flags in the RAM 553 of the sub control device 262 described above correspond to the specific display effect control means of the invention according to (B1).

<Effects of Example 2>
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the audible frequency band (first specific sound: 19 kHz, second specific sound : 17 kHz, third specific sound: 15 kHz), the production mode of the reach promotion production, that is, the reach promotion production A where all promotion productions can be seen, and some promotion productions can be seen. There is a difference in whether the ready-to-reach promotion effect B, which cannot be played, or the ready-to-reach promotion effect C, to which the number of promotion effects that can be seen is the smallest, is selected. A player who can hear a specific sound having a high frequency band can see a ready-to-win promotion effect with a higher number of promotions. Therefore, since the player tries to recognize a higher audible frequency band as much as possible according to his/her age group, the interest of the ready-to-win promotion effect started based on the detection of the depression of the effect button 80. can be improved.

Example 3 is an example of the invention described in (C system) described later.
The pachinko machine 10 of Example 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 43. FIG. FIG. 38 shows the main part of the block part showing the electrical configuration of the third embodiment. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing the starting winning process according to the third embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the prefetch lottery process. FIG. 41 is a flowchart illustrating specific sound output processing according to the third embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing a variable display mode setting process according to the third embodiment. FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the look-ahead effect.

The differences of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment from those of the first and second embodiments will be described with reference to FIG.

The sub-control device 262 of the present embodiment, when the first, second, and third specific sound output flags are winning determination (pre-reading winning) in which the determination result of the unexecuted variable display is the specific display mode, In addition, if multiple variable displays for unexecuted items are suspended before the variable display for the unexecuted items for which the winning judgment is made, it is provided during the multiple variable display periods that are performed after the cancellation of the unexecuted variable display conditions. It is different from the first, second and third specific sound output flags of the first and second embodiments in that control is performed to output the first, second and third specific sounds within the specified specific sound production period. In addition, the sub-control device 262, based on the fact that the audible frequency band has been grasped, sets the effect mode of the look-ahead notice based on the look-ahead winning (display with the stop symbol as the chance number "341") to the first and second production modes. , 3rd pre-reading notice effect is determined, and the first, second and third pre-reading notice flags for controlling to display the pre-reading notice on the third symbol display device 42 in the decided effect mode. is also different from the first and second embodiments. The following description focuses on the differences from other embodiments.

<Start winning process>
The starting winning process of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The starting winning process of this embodiment is the same as the starting winning process of the first embodiment up to steps S701 to S704, but in step S705, a prefetching lottery process described below is performed.

The look-ahead lottery process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S3401, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 determines whether or not the number of unexecuted variable displays stored in the reserved ball storage area (hereinafter referred to as the reserved number) is four. That is, the prefetching lottery is conditioned that the unexecuted variable display is stored in all of the first, second, third, and fourth reservation areas. If the number of reservations is 4, the process proceeds to step S3402; otherwise, the process ends. Although the condition for the number of reserves is 4 (full tank), it may be 4 or more, or the number may be less than the full tank.

In step S3402, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 performs a pre-reading lottery to determine whether or not the result of the variation display for the unexecuted portion stored in the fourth reservation area will be a big win. The prefetching lottery is performed based on the value of the jackpot random number C1 in the variation display of the unexecuted portion stored in the fourth reservation area.

In step S3403, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 determines whether or not the result of the prefetch lottery is winning. If the value of the jackpot random number C1 in the unexecuted variable display is a winning value, the result of the prefetching lottery is winning. If the result of the look-ahead lottery is winning, the process proceeds to step S3404; otherwise, the process ends.

In step S3404, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 sets the prefetch winning flag to "1" and terminates this process. The look-ahead winning flag is provided in the RAM 503 of the main controller 261, and determines whether or not the result of the variation display for the unexecuted portion will result in a big win.

The prefetch winning flag provided in the RAM 503 of the main controller 261 described above corresponds to the unexecuted portion determining means of the invention according to (C1).

Note that the effect button input monitoring/effect processing shown in FIG. 22 and the effect execution management processing shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the variation pattern with a specific sound effect corresponding to step S1701 is the variation pattern for the first suspension when the prefetch lottery performed by the maximum number of suspensions is won for the fourth suspension. . In the specific sound listening determination process shown in FIG. 24, the step of counting the number of times the specific sound is heard is replaced with the step of setting the above-mentioned first to third pre-reading notice flags to "1". The specific sound output period setting process shown in FIG. 25 is performed as follows according to this embodiment.

<Specific sound output period setting process>
Specific sound output processing in this embodiment will be described below with reference to FIG.

In step S3600, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the specific sound effect start flag is "1". The specific sound effect start flag is set to "1" when the prefetching lottery performed by the maximum number (4) of holds is won for the fourth hold. If the specific sound effect start flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S3202 in order to start the specific sound effect, otherwise the process ends.

In step S3601, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 issues a specific sound effect display start command for controlling the display control device 45 to display the display necessary for starting the specific sound effect on the third pattern display device 42. set.

In step S3602, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines that the variable display to be determined is based on the unexecuted variable display stored in the first reserve area at the time of prefetch winning (hereinafter referred to as the first reserve at the time of prefetch winning). It is determined whether or not. If it is the first hold at the time of prefetch winning, the process proceeds to step S3603; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3610.

In step S3603, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the first specific sound output timing has arrived during the variable display based on the first suspension at the time of prefetch winning. The first specific sound output timing is provided during the variable display period based on the first hold. If the first specific sound output timing has arrived, the process proceeds to step S3604; otherwise, the process ends.

In step S3604, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the first specific sound output flag to "1", sets the first specific sound output start command, and proceeds to step S3205. The first specific sound output end command is transmitted to the sound output control device 47 .

In step S3605, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 decrements the timer to count the output period during which the first specific sound is output. In step S3506, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the timer value has reached zero. If the timer value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S3607, and if the timer value becomes 0, the process proceeds to step S3609, which will be described later.

In step S3607, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the first specific sound listening flag described in step S2003 of FIG. 24 is "1". If the first specific sound listening flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S3609; otherwise (if "0"), this process ends.

When the first specific sound listening flag is set to "1", the first pre-reading notice flag is also set to "1". The first prefetch notice flag is determined according to the fact that the first specific sound listening flag is set to "1". Control to start the look-ahead notice effect.

When the first prefetching notice flag is “1”, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 transmits the first prefetching notice command to the display control device 45 . The display control device 45 performs a first pre-reading announcement effect, which will be described later.

In step S3609, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the first specific sound output flag to "0" and sets the first specific sound output end command. The first specific sound output end command is transmitted to the sound output control device 47 . This completes the processing.

In step S3610, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines that the variable display to be determined is based on the unexecuted variable display stored in the second reserve area at the time of prefetch winning (hereinafter referred to as the second reserve at the time of prefetch winning). It is determined whether or not. If it is the second hold at the time of prefetch winning, the process proceeds to step S3611; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3619.

In step S3611, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the first specific sound listening flag is "1". If the first specific sound listening flag is "1", the pre-reading announcement effect has already started, so this processing ends. If the first specific sound listening flag is not "1", the process proceeds to step S3612.

In step S3612, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the second specific sound output timing has arrived. The second specific sound output timing is provided during the variable display period based on the second hold. If the second specific sound output timing has arrived, the process proceeds to step S36113; otherwise, the process ends.

In step S3613, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the second specific sound output flag to "1", sets the second specific sound output start command, and proceeds to step S3213. The second specific sound output start command is output to the audio output control device 47 .

In step S3614, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 decrements the timer to count the output period during which the second specific sound is output. In step S3615, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the timer value has reached zero. If the timer value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S3616, and if the timer value becomes 0, the process proceeds to step S3618, which will be described later.

In step S3616, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the second specific sound listening flag described above in step S2005 of FIG. 24 is "1". If the second specific sound listening flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S3617; otherwise (if "0"), this process ends.

When the second specific sound listening flag is set to "1", the second pre-reading notice flag is also set to "1". The second prefetch notice flag is determined according to the fact that the second specific sound listening flag is set to "1". Control to start the look-ahead notice effect.

When the second prefetching notice flag is set to “1”, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 transmits the second prefetching notice command to the display control device 45 . The display control device 45 performs a second pre-reading preview effect, which will be described later.

In step S3618, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the second specific sound output flag to "0" and sets the second specific sound output end command. The second specific sound output end command is transmitted to the audio output control device 47 . This completes the processing.

In step S3619, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines that the variable display to be determined is based on the unexecuted variable display stored in the third reservation area 403d at the time of prefetch winning (hereinafter referred to as the third reserve at the time of prefetch winning). It is determined whether or not the If it is the third hold at the time of prefetch winning, the process proceeds to step S3620, and if not, the process ends.

In step S3620, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the first specific sound listening flag or the second specific sound listening flag is "1". If the first specific sound listening flag or the second specific sound listening flag is "1", the pre-reading notice has already started, so this process ends. If neither the first specific sound listening flag nor the second specific sound listening flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S3621.

In step S3621, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the third specific sound output timing has arrived. The third specific sound output timing is provided during the variable display period based on the third hold. If the third specific sound output timing has arrived, the process proceeds to step S3622; otherwise, the process ends.

In step S3622, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the third specific sound output flag to "1", sets the third specific sound output start command, and proceeds to step S3623. The third specific sound output start command is output to the audio output control device 47 .

In step S3623, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 decrements the timer to count the output period during which the third specific sound is output. In step S3624, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the timer value has reached zero. If the timer value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S3625, and if the timer value becomes 0, the process proceeds to step S3627, which will be described later.

In step S3625, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the third specific sound listening flag described in step S2007 of FIG. 24 is "1". If the third specific sound listening flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S3626; otherwise (if "0"), this process ends.

In step S3626, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the third specific sound listening flag to "1" and the third pre-reading notice flag to "1", and proceeds to step S3627.

When the third specific sound listening flag is set to "1", the third pre-reading notice flag is also set to "1". The third prefetch notice flag is determined according to the fact that the third specific sound listening flag is set to "1". Control to start the look-ahead notice effect.

When the third prefetching notice flag is set to “1”, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 transmits the third prefetching notice command to the display control device 45 . The display control device 45 performs a third pre-reading announcement effect, which will be described later.

In step S3627, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the third specific sound output flag to "0" and sets the third specific sound output end command. The third specific sound output end command is transmitted to the audio output control device 47 . This completes the processing.

<Variable display mode setting processing>
A variable display mode setting process according to the third embodiment will be described below with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 42, in step S3701, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 proceeds to step S3702 if the variation pattern designation command is received, and proceeds to step S3705 if not received.

In step S3702, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the prefetch winning flag is "1". If the prefetch winning flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S3703; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3704.

In step S3703, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a display command including a specific sound effect, and terminates this process. In step S3704, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a display command that does not include the specific sound effect, and terminates this process.

In step S3705, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 proceeds to step S3706 if the decorative design designation command is received, and terminates this process if not received.

In step S3706, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the first to third prefetching notice flags are "1". If the first to third prefetch warning flags are "1", the process proceeds to step S3707; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3710.

In step S3707, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a stop display command with the stop symbol of the variable display corresponding to the first to third pre-reading notice flags as the chance. Chance eyes are predetermined stop symbols such as ``3'', ``4'', and ``1'', for example, and there is usually an expectation that a big win will occur in the variation display after the variation display that ends with the chance eyes. This is a stop symbol that suggests higher than the off stop symbol.

In step S3708, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the determination target is the prefetch winning third hold. If the determination target is the third hold at the time of prefetch winning, the process proceeds to step S3709; otherwise, the process ends.

In step S3709, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the first to third pre-reading notice flags to "0" and terminates this process. The 1st to 3rd pre-reading notice flags are controlled so that the pre-reading notice is performed until the fluctuation display performed after the change non-execution condition cancellation based on the 3rd reservation at the time of winning immediately before the 4th reservation at the time of winning the pre-reading winning. .

In step S3710, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a stop display command that does not set the chance eye as a stop symbol because the first to third pre-reading notice flags are not "1" in step S3706, and ends this processing. do.

The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the first, second, and third prefetching notice commands and transmits them to the display control device 45 when the first, second, and third prefetching notice flags are "1". do. Based on the first, second, and third pre-reading notice commands, the display control device 45 changes the stop patterns (chance eyes) of the first, second, and third reservations to different colors (silver, gold, rainbow color). The details will be described with an example of the following first to third pre-reading forewarning effects.

<Example of pre-reading preview effect>
An example of the first to third look-ahead announcement effects will be described with reference to FIG.

In this example, four holds are generated during the variable display period, and as a result of prefetching lotteries for each hold, the result of the prefetching lottery for the fourth hold is winning. At this time, the specific sound effect period is set from the start (timing Ta) of the variable display period based on the first hold at the time of prefetch winning to the end of the variable display period (timing Td) based on the third hold at the time of prefetch winning. . The first specific sound output period is set during the first specific sound output possible period (timings Ta to Tb) corresponding to the fluctuation period based on the first hold at the time of prefetch winning. The second specific sound output period is set during the second specific sound output possible period (timings Tb to Tc) corresponding to the variable period based on the second hold at the time of prefetch winning. The third specific sound output period is set during the third specific sound output enabled period (timings Tc to Td) corresponding to the variable period based on the third hold at the time of prefetch winning.

When the depression of the effect button 80 is detected at timing t1 during the first specific sound output period, the first pre-reading advance notice effect is started. In the first pre-reading notice effect, the pre-reading notice effect is performed three times as a result of being able to listen to the first specific sound during the validity determination period of the first specific sound. Specifically, as a result of the variable display based on the first hold at the time of prefetch winning, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a state of shining silver at the chances of "3", "4" and "1". Next, as a result of the variable display based on the second reservation at the time of prefetch winning, the third pattern is stopped and displayed again in the chances of ``3'', ``4'', and ``1'' and in a state of shining gold. Next, as a result of the variable display based on the third reservation at the time of prefetch winning, the third pattern is stopped and displayed again at the chances of ``3'', ``4'' and ``1'' and in a state of shining in rainbow colors. Finally, the result of the variable display based on the fourth reservation at the time of prefetch winning is the big win display result.

In this way, in the first look-ahead notice effect, the player can see all of the first chance (silver), second chance (gold), and third chance (rainbow). By making the display of the third chance (rainbow color) a confirmation display of the big win, the player's expectation for the result of the big win display is gradually increased by the first and second look-ahead notice effects. At the same time, it is possible to increase the expectation that a big win will be displayed in the third variable display.

When the pressing of the effect button 80 is detected at timing t2 during the second specific sound output period, the second pre-reading forewarning effect is started. In the second pre-reading advance notice effect, two pre-reading notice effects are performed as a result of being able to listen to the second specific sound during the second specific sound validity determination period. Specifically, the variable display based on the first reserve at the time of prefetch winning is stopped and displayed as a normal lost symbol. Next, as a result of the variable display based on the second reservation at the time of prefetch winning, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a state of shining in silver at the chances of "3", "4" and "1". Next, as a result of the variable display based on the third reserve at the time of prefetching winning, the third pattern is stopped and displayed again in the chances of "3", "4" and "1" and in a state of shining gold. Finally, the result of the variable display based on the fourth reservation at the time of prefetch winning is the big win display result.

Thus, in the second look-ahead foretelling effect, the player can see the first chance (silver color)→the second chance (gold color). In addition, the second pre-reading notice effect is displayed not only when the big hit display result is displayed, but also when the result is a missed display result. It is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that there will always be a display result.

When the depression of the effect button 80 is detected at timing t3 during the third specific sound output period, the third pre-reading forewarning effect is started. In the third pre-reading notice effect, one pre-reading notice effect is performed as a result of being able to listen to the third specific sound during the third specific sound validity determination period. Specifically, the variable display based on the first reserve when prefetching winning and the variable display based on the second reserve when prefetching winning are stopped and displayed as normal lost symbols. Next, as a result of the variable display based on the third reserve at the time of prefetch winning, the third pattern is stop-displayed in a state of shining silver at the chances of "3", "4" and "1". Finally, the result of the variable display based on the fourth reservation at the time of prefetch winning is the big win display result.

Thus, in the third pre-reading announcement effect, even if the player cannot hear the first and second specific sounds when the pre-reading lottery result based on the fourth hold is winning, 3 If the player can hear the specific sound, he/she can see the pre-reading forewarning effect for one time. In addition, the third pre-reading notice effect is displayed more often than the second pre-reading notice effect when the display result is out of sight, so in the third pre-reading notice effect (only one chance (silver)), It is possible to give the impression that the expectation of the big win display result is low compared to the second look-ahead foretelling effect. In such an impression, the variation display based on the fourth reserve at the time of prefetch winning after the third prefetch announcement effect becomes a big win display result, so that the player can be given unexpectedness.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the player who can hear the specific sound having a higher frequency band can see the pre-reading notice effect with a larger number of pre-reading notices.

The above-described first to third pre-reading notice flags in the RAM 553 of the sub control device 262 correspond to the pre-reading notice control means of the invention according to (C1).

<Effect of Example 3>
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the audible frequency band (first specific sound: 19 kHz, second specific sound : 17 kHz, third specific sound: 15 kHz), the production mode of the pre-reading notice effect, that is, the first pre-reading notice effect with the highest number of pre-reading notices (three times), the number of pre-reading notices There is a difference in which of the second pre-reading notice effect, which has the second largest number of pre-reading notices (two times), and the third pre-reading notice effect, which has the least number of pre-reading notices (one time). A player who can hear the specific sound having a higher frequency band can see a pre-reading notice effect with a larger number of pre-reading notices. Therefore, since the player tries to recognize a higher audible frequency band as much as possible according to his/her age group, the interest of the look-ahead notice effect that is started based on the detection of the pressing of the effect button 80 is enhanced. can be improved.

Example 4 is an embodiment of the invention described in (D system) described later.
The pachinko machine 10 of Example 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 47. FIG. FIG. 44 is a block diagram showing essential parts of the electrical configuration of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a variable display mode setting process by the sub-controller 262 according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing specific sound output processing by the sub-controller 262 according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 47 is a diagram for explaining the step-up notice effect.

Referring to FIG. 44, the points of difference between the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment and the pachinko machines 10 of the first to third embodiments will be described.

The sub-control device 262 of this embodiment includes the first, second, and third one-shot notification flags of the first embodiment, the first, second, and third reach promotion effect flags of the second embodiment, and the Rendering of a step-up notice performance in which a step-up image described later is displayed a plurality of times on the third pattern display device 42 based on the grasp of the audible frequency band instead of the first, second, and third fore-reading notice flags. A mode (the number of steps) is determined, and in the determined mode, the first, second, and third step image display flags are provided for controlling to display the step-up notice effect on the third pattern display device 42. , are different from Examples 1-3. The following description focuses on the differences from other embodiments.

Note that the effect button input monitoring/effect processing shown in FIG. 22 and the effect execution management processing shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the variation pattern with the specific sound effect corresponding to step S1701 is the reach (premium reach) with the highest expectation for the occurrence of a big hit, and the variation pattern determined to perform the step-up notice effect. is. In the specific sound listening determination process shown in FIG. 24, the step of counting the number of times the specific sound is heard is replaced with the step of setting the above-described first, second, and third step image display flags to "1".

<Variable display mode setting processing>
A variable display mode setting process according to the fourth embodiment will be described below with reference to FIG. 45 .

As shown in FIG. 45, in step S3801, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 proceeds to step S2302 if a variation pattern designation command has been received, and proceeds to step S2308 if not.

In step S3802, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the variation pattern specification command is premium reach. The premium reach is a reach effect with the highest degree of expectation for the occurrence of a big hit, and when the reach effect appears, the big win is almost decided. In addition, you may determine whether it is a specific reach other than a premium reach. If it is premium reach, the process proceeds to step S3803, and if it is not premium reach, this processing ends.

In step S3803, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not to perform the step-up notice effect. If the step-up notice effect is performed, the process proceeds to step S3804, and if the step-up notice effect is not performed, the process proceeds to step S3806.

In step S3804, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the step-up notice effect flag to "1". In step S3805, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a symbol row variation display command including a step-up notice effect, and terminates this processing.

In step S3806, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a display command for symbol row variation that does not include the step-up notice effect, and terminates this processing.

In step S3807, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 proceeds to step S3808 if the decorative design designation command is received, and terminates this process if not received.

In step S3809, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a stop display command according to the designated stop symbol, and terminates this process.

<Specific sound output period setting process>
As shown in FIG. 46, in step S3901, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the specific sound effect start flag is "1". The specific sound effect start flag is set to "1" when it is the reach (premium reach) with the highest expectation for the occurrence of a big hit and when it is determined that the step-up notice effect is to be performed. If the specific sound effect start flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S3902 in order to start the specific sound effect, otherwise the process ends.

In step S3902, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 issues a specific sound effect display start command for controlling the display control device 45 to display the display necessary for starting the specific sound effect on the third pattern display device 42. set.

In step S3903, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the third specific sound output timing has arrived in the step-up notice effect. The third specific sound is a specific sound in the lowest frequency band among the three specific sounds output in the step-up notice effect. If it is the third specific sound output timing, the process proceeds to step S3904; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3912.

In step S3904, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the third specific sound output flag to "1", sets the third specific sound output start command, and proceeds to step S3905. The third specific sound output end command is transmitted to the audio output control device 47 . The third specific sound output period in step S3904 corresponds to the first step period in the step-up notice effect.

In step S3905, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 subtracts the timer to count the output period during which the third specific sound is output. In step S3906, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the timer value has reached zero. If the timer value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S3908, and if the timer value becomes 0, the process proceeds to step S3907, which will be described later.

In step S3907, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the third specific sound output flag to "0" and sets the first specific sound output end command. The first specific sound output end command is transmitted to the sound output control device 47 . This completes the processing.

In step S3908, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the third specific sound listening flag described in step S2007 of FIG. 24 is "1". If the third specific sound listening flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S3907, otherwise (if "0"), this process ends.

When the third specific sound listening flag is set to "1", the first step image display flag indicating the start of the first step effect in the step-up notice effect is also set to "1". The first step image display flag is stored in the RAM 553 of the sub-controller 262 .

When the first step image display flag is set to "1", the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the first step information display command. The first step information display command is sent to the display control device 45 . The display control device 45 starts the first step effect in the step-up notice effect based on the first step information display command, and displays a first step image SU1, which will be described later. When the first step effect period ends, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 resets the first step image display flag to "0".

Next, in step S3910, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the second specific sound output timing has arrived in the step-up notice effect. If it is the second specific sound output timing, the process proceeds to step S3911; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3919.

In step S3912, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the third specific sound listening flag is "1". If the third specific sound listening flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S3913; otherwise, the process ends.

In step S3913, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the second specific sound output flag to "1", sets the second specific sound output start command, and proceeds to step S3914. The second specific sound output start command is output to the audio output control device 47 . The second specific sound output flag is a flag that raises the frequency band from the third specific sound to the second specific sound by one step and outputs it based on the setting of the third specific sound listening flag to "1". The second specific sound output period in step S3913 corresponds to the second step period in the step-up notice effect.

In step S3914, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 decrements the timer to count the output period of the second specific sound. In step S3915, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the timer value is zero. If the timer value becomes 0, the process advances to step S3916. In step S3916, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the second specific sound output flag to "0" and sets the second specific sound output end command. The second specific sound output end command is transmitted to the audio output control device 47 . This completes the processing.

If the timer value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S3917. In step S3917, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the second specific sound listening flag described above in step S2005 of FIG. 24 is "1". If the second specific sound listening flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S3916, otherwise (if "0"), this process ends.

When the second specific sound listening flag is set to "1", the second step image display flag indicating that the second step effect in the step-up notice effect is started is also set to "1". The second step image display flag is stored in the RAM 553 of the sub control device 262 .

When the second step image display flag is set to "1", the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the second step information display command. The second step information display command is sent to the display control device 45 . As shown in FIG. 47, the display control device 45 starts the second step effect in the step-up notice effect based on the second step information display command, and displays the above-described first step image SU1 during the second step effect period. , a second step image SU2, which will be described later, is displayed. When the second step effect period ends, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 returns the second step image display flag to "0".

In step S3919, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the first specific sound output timing has arrived in the step-up announcement effect. If it is the first specific sound output timing, the process proceeds to step S3922. If it is not the third specific sound output timing, this processing is terminated.

In step S3921, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the second specific sound listening flag is set to "1". If the second specific sound listening flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S3922; otherwise, the process ends.

In step S3922, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the first specific sound output flag to "1", sets the first specific sound output start command, and proceeds to step S3923. The first specific sound output start command is output to the audio output control device 47 . The first specific sound output flag is a flag that raises the frequency band by one step from the second specific sound to the first specific sound and outputs it based on the setting of the second specific sound listening flag to "1". The first specific sound output period in step S3922 corresponds to the third step period in the step-up notice effect.

In step S3923, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 decrements the timer to count the output period of the first specific sound. In step S3924, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the timer value is zero. If the timer value becomes 0, the process proceeds to step S3925. In step S3925, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the first specific sound output flag to "0" and sets the first specific sound output end command. The first specific sound output end command is transmitted to the sound output control device 47 . This completes the processing.

If the timer value is not 0, the process proceeds to step S3926. In step S3926, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the first specific sound listening flag described in step S2003 of FIG. 24 is "1". If the first specific sound listening flag is "1", the process proceeds to the above step S3625; otherwise (if "0"), this process ends.

In step S3926, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the first specific sound listening flag to "1", and sets the third step image display flag indicating that the third step effect is to be started in the step-up notice effect. Set to "1". The third step image display flag is stored in the RAM 553 of the sub control device 262 .

When the third step image display flag is set to "1", the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the third step information display command. The third step information display command is sent to the display control device 45 . As shown in FIG. 47, the display control device 45 starts the third step effect in the step-up notice effect based on the third step information display command, and displays the above-described second step image SU2 during the third step effect period. , a third step image SU3, which will be described later, is displayed. When the third step effect period ends, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 returns the third step image display flag to "0".

Note that the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the specific sound effect start flag to 0 upon completion of this process.

<Example of step-up notice effect>
An example of the step-up notice effect will be described with reference to FIG.

In the step-up notice effect, as the color of the image displayed in the first step image SU1, the second step image SU2, and the third step image SU3 improves (changes from silver to gold to rainbow), the expected degree of jackpot increases. It is a heightened performance. In this example, the step-up advance notice effect is displayed three times consecutively at maximum during the variable display period. The variable display period is set to 40 seconds, and the latter 2 seconds is set to the fixed display period. In addition, the ready-to-win effect is started after 8 seconds from the start of fluctuation. The specific sound production period is set 8 seconds to 32 seconds after the start of fluctuation during the ready-to-win production period. The third specific sound (15 kHz) output possible period is set from 8 seconds to 16 seconds after the start of fluctuation, the second specific sound (17 kHz) output possible period is set from 16 seconds to 24 seconds after the start of fluctuation, and the first The specific sound (19 kHz) output possible period is set from 24 seconds to 32 seconds after the fluctuation starts.

The third specific sound output period is set for two seconds in the third specific sound output enabled period, that is, 10 seconds to 12 seconds after the fluctuation starts. The second specific sound output period is set for two seconds in the second specific sound output enabled period, that is, 20 seconds to 22 seconds after the start of fluctuation. The first specific sound output period is set for two seconds in the second specific sound output enabled period, that is, 28 seconds to 30 seconds after the fluctuation starts.

When the production button 80 is operated at timing t1 (11 seconds after the start of fluctuation) within the third specific sound validity determination period, the first step image SU1 is displayed for two seconds from the timing when the third specific sound output enabled period ends. be done. The first step image SU1 suggests that the reach effect is normal reach during the first step effect period. This is an image displayed on the third symbol display device 42 in . If the effect button 80 is not operated within the third specific sound validity determination period, the first step image SU1 is not displayed, and finally a big win display result is displayed.

It should be noted that the step-up notice effect may be displayed not only in the case of the big win display result but also in the case of the loss display result. In the case of a result of the out-of-screen display, the step-up notice effect should be ended after the first step image SU1 is displayed. This makes it difficult for the player to predict the subsequent variable display result at the time when the first step image SU1 is displayed.

When the effect button 80 is operated at timing t2 (21 seconds after the start of fluctuation) within the second specific sound validity determination period, the second step image SU2 is displayed for two seconds from the timing when the second specific sound output enable period ends. be done. The second step image SU2 suggests that the reach display is super reach. It is an image displayed on the display device 42 . When the effect button 80 is not operated within the second specific sound validity determination period, the step-up notice effect is displayed up to the first step, and finally a big win display result is obtained.

As described above, the second step image SU2 may be displayed in the case of the result of the display of being out. In that case, the step-up notice effect ends after the second step image SU2 is displayed. In this way, when the second step image SU2 is displayed, the expectation of the big win display result increases, but it is still difficult for the player to predict the subsequent variable display result.

When the effect button 80 is operated at timing t3 (29 seconds after the start of fluctuation) within the first specific sound validity determination period, the third step image SU3 is displayed for two seconds from the timing when the first specific sound output enabled period ends. be done. The third step image SU3 suggests that the reach effect is the premium reach. This is an image displayed on the 3-symbol display device 42 . Thus, when the effect button 80 is operated within the first specific sound validity determination period, the player can see all of the first step image SU1 to the third step image SU3 in the step-up notice effect. When the effect button 80 is not operated within the first specific sound validity determination period, the step-up notice effect is displayed up to the second step, and finally the big win display result is obtained.

The third step image SU3 is displayed when the big win is confirmed, or when the probability of the big win display result being about 90% is high. By doing so, it is possible to maximize the player's expectation that a big win will be displayed when the third step image SU3 is displayed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the player who can hear the specific sound having a higher frequency band can watch the step-up announcement effect with a larger number of steps over a longer period of time.

Thus, in the step-up notice effect, all the first to third step images SU1 to SU3 are displayed if all the first to third specific sounds can be heard. On the other hand, if the second and third specific sounds can be heard, the first and second step S information SU1 and SU2 are displayed. If only the third specific sound can be heard, only the third step information SU1 is displayed.

The first to third step images SU1 to SU3 described above correspond to the specific step information of the invention according to (D1). The first to third step image display flags in the RAM 553 of the sub control device 262 described above correspond to step-up effect control means of the invention according to (D1).

<Effects of Example 4>
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the audible frequency band (first specific sound: 19 kHz, second specific sound sound: 17 kHz, third specific sound: 15 kHz), it is possible to hear all the first to third specific sounds in the production mode of the step-up notice production, that is, in the first to third steps. Therefore, all the first to third step images SU1 to SU3 are displayed, or the second and third specific sounds can be heard in the first to third steps, so that the first and second step images SU1, SU1, The difference is whether SU2 is displayed or only the first step image SU1 is displayed because only the third specific sound was heard in the first to third steps. A player who can hear a specific sound having a high frequency band can watch a step-up announcement effect with a large number of steps over a longer period of time. Therefore, since the player tries to recognize a higher audible frequency band as much as possible according to his/her age, the interest of the step-up notice effect started based on the detection of pressing of the effect button 80 is enhanced. can be improved.

Example 5 is an example of the invention described below (E system).
The pachinko machine 10 of Example 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50. FIG. FIG. 48 is a front view of the game board 30 of Example 5. FIG. FIG. 49 is a block diagram showing the essential parts of the electrical configuration of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 50 is a diagram for explaining the number-of-opens suggesting effect and the advantageous game state suggesting effect.

With reference to FIG. 48, the points of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment different from those of the first to fourth embodiments will be described.

As shown in FIG. 48, the game board 30 is arranged below the first starting openings 33a arranged on the left side and the right side below the board surface, and below the first starting opening 33a on the left side below the board surface. and a second starting port (chucker) 33b. The second starting port 33b has second starting port blades 33b1 and 33b2 that change between a normal state in which the game ball B cannot be entered and a specific state in which the game ball B is easier to enter than in the normal state. It has In addition, the game board 30 is provided with a third starting opening (through gate) 34 above the pinwheel 37 through which the game ball B can pass.

The game board 30 also has a winning device 200 extending vertically in the center of the game area. The winning device 200 can have an internal space divided into an upper body 200a and a lower body 200b. The prize-winning device 200 includes two upper ball openings 201a and 201b provided at upper portions on both left and right sides of the upper main body 200a and into which game balls B can enter, and blades 203a and 203a for opening and closing the upper ball openings 201a and 201b. 203b and a guide passage portion 202 for passing and guiding the game ball B entering the upper ball entrances 201a and 201b are provided in a frame-like frame member.

In addition, the winning device 200 includes a stage 203 for visually recognizing the game ball B guided by the guide passage portion 202, and a discharge portion 204 for discharging the game ball B guided to stay on the stage 203 to the lower main body 200b. , and a variable display device 60 for performing various variable displays and display performances on the far side of the stage 203 .

The prize winning device 200 includes a lower ball entry portion 205 that allows the game ball B discharged from the discharge portion 204 to enter the lower body 200b, and a game ball B that enters the lower body 200b. A specific prize winning portion 210 (V zone) that triggers the occurrence of an advantageous game state, a normal prize winning portion 212 that allows a game ball B to enter separately from the specific prize winning portion 210 (V zone), and a bottom entry ball. A rolling surface 214 on which a game ball B entered from a part 205 rolls and a game ball B which rolls on the rolling surface 214 come into contact with each other to win a specific winning part 210 or a normal winning part 212. - 特許庁and a movable driving body 216 (movable accessory) that sorts out as follows.

As shown in FIG. 49, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment includes a main controller 261 and a sub-controller 262, like the first embodiment described above.

The main controller 261 detects that the game ball B has entered the first starting hole 33a and the first starting hole sensor 33a1 that detects that the game ball B has entered the second starting hole 33b. A second starting hole sensor 33b3, a third starting hole sensor 34a that detects that the game ball B has passed through the through gate 34, and a V detection sensor 43 that detects that the game ball has entered the specific winning portion 210. , a detection sensor 44 for detecting a game ball B entering the normal winning portion 212, and a passing sensor 206 for detecting the number of winnings for detecting a game ball entering the lower main body 200b through the lower ball entering portion 205, and the like. It is connected.

The main controller 261 drives the blade driving device 49 to open the blades 203a and 203b using the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 33a1 or the second starting port sensor 33b3 as a trigger. The blades 203a and 203b are opened once at the same time (open for 2 seconds → closed), and open twice at the same time (open for 2 seconds → close for 1 second → open for 2 seconds → close). There is a pattern. The main controller 261 has a random number for determining the number of times of opening for determining the number of times of opening by lottery.

The sub-control device 262 displays on the variable display device 60 a display effect that informs the player whether the opening pattern is the first opening pattern or the second opening pattern according to the lottery result of the main control device 261.例文帳に追加The display controller 45 is instructed to do so. The duration of the display effect is a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds from the detection of the incoming ball by the first start sensor 33a1 or the second start sensor 33b3). That is, after the moving picture "bubbles in the sea bubbling" showing the state in which the lottery for the open pattern is being performed is displayed for 3 seconds, in the case of the first open pattern, "open once" is displayed in the bubbles. A character image is displayed for one second. In the case of the second open pattern, a moving image of "bubbles bubbling in the sea" is displayed for 3 seconds, and then a character image of "open twice" is displayed in the bubbles for 2 seconds.

The main controller 261 starts opening the blades 203a and 203b at the timing when four seconds have passed since the first starting hole sensor 33a1 or the second starting hole sensor 33b3 detected the entering ball. When the first start sensor 33a1 or the second start sensor 33b3 detects an entering ball during the display effect on the variable display device 60, the main controller 261 continues the detection of the entering ball until the end of the display effect. Hold. A maximum of four penetrating ball detection suspensions can be suspended, and the suspensions are displayed on the variable display device 60 .

In addition, the main controller 261 uses the detection signal from the third starting port sensor 34a as a trigger to randomly determine whether or not to open the second starting port blades 33b1 and 33b2. The sub-control device 262 gives an instruction to the display control device 45 so that the variable display device 60 displays a variable display indicating whether or not to open the second starting mouth blades 33b1 and 33b2 according to the result of the lottery. The duration of the display effect is a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds after the passage is detected by the third start opening sensor 34a). That is, after a variable display of alternately displaying symbol images of "○" and "×" indicating the state of the lottery being performed is performed for 3 seconds, "○" is stopped and displayed for 1 second if the winner is selected. . In addition, if the winner is not selected, the variable display of "O" and "X" is performed for 3 seconds, and then the "X" is stopped and displayed for 1 second.

The main controller 261 starts opening the second starting port blades 33b1 and 33b2 at the timing of four seconds after the detection of the entering ball by the third starting port sensor 34a. When the third start sensor 34a detects an entering ball during the variable display on the variable display device 60, the main controller 261 suspends the detection of the entering ball until the end of the variable display. A maximum of four penetrating ball detection suspensions can be suspended, and the suspensions are displayed on the variable display device 60 . In addition, in the normal game state, the lottery result is rarely "○", and in the time saving state described later, the lottery result is likely to be "○".

In this way, from the display of the lottery result of the opening pattern until the opening of the blades 203a and 203b is started (after the result of the fluctuation display of "○" and "X" is displayed, the second starting mouth blade 33b1, 33b2) is relatively short. Therefore, when the shooting of the game ball is stopped until the lottery result of the open pattern is obtained, and the shooting of the game ball is resumed after the lottery result of the open pattern is obtained, the second open pattern is being opened at the latest. In this case, it becomes easy to enter the game ball into the upper ball entrances 201a and 201b. difficult to let Of course, if the game balls continue to be shot even during the display effect, the problem of the open pattern may not occur, but depending on how the nails struck around the upper ball openings 201a and 201b are adjusted, the shooting intensity of the game balls may be reduced. Without adjustment, it may be difficult to enter the ball into the upper ball entrances 201a and 201b. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a specific sound effect period is provided in the middle of the display effect indicating the lottery for the opening pattern, first to third specific sound output periods are provided in the specific sound effect period, and the first to third specific sounds are provided. When the effect button 80 is operated within the validity determination period, the number-of-opening suggestion performance is executed to display on the variable display device 60 a number-of-opening suggestion image suggesting the result of the lottery for the opening pattern.

Below, the configuration for executing the number-of-opening suggestion effect will be described.

The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 provides a specific sound effect period in the middle of the display effect indicating the lottery for the opening pattern, provides first to third specific sound output periods within the specific sound effect period, and sets the first to third specific sound effect periods. To grasp the frequency band of a specific sound heard by a player when a performance button 80 is operated within a sound validity determination period. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 causes the variable display device 60 to display the first to third specific sound listening images and the number-of-opening suggestion image based on the frequency band of the specific sound heard by the player. Display control for the display control device 45 is performed as follows.

Specifically, when the effect button 80 is operated within the first specific sound validity determination period, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the first specific sound listening flag to "1", and the result of the lottery is In the case of the first opening pattern, the one-time opening suggestion flag is set to "1". When the first specific sound listening flag and the one-time open suggestion flag are set to “1”, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 sets the one-time open suggestion command and transmits it to the display control device 45 . The display control device 45 receives the one-time opening suggesting command and performs display control to display a one-time opening suggesting image, which will be described later, on the variable display device 60 . Further, when the result of the lottery is the second opening pattern, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the 2-time opening suggestion flag to "1", and similarly, the 2-time opening suggestion image, which will be described later, is displayed on the variable display device. 60 is displayed.

Next, the jackpot state and the like will be described. When the game ball B enters (wins) the specific winning section 210 (V zone) in a normal game state, the main controller 261 generates a jackpot state in which the opening and closing operations of the blades 203a and 203b are performed up to a predetermined round. , When a ball enters the normal prize winning part 212, a prize ball for the entering ball is given, and a big win state is not generated. The main controller 261 has a maximum round determination random number for determining the maximum number of rounds. Triggered by the detection signal from the V detection sensor 43, the main controller 261 determines whether the maximum number of rounds should be 2, 7, or 15 based on the maximum round determination random number at the time of detection. .

The main controller 261 counts the number of game balls B winning (entrance balls) to the lower main body 200b of the winning device 200, triggered by the detection signal from the winning number detection passage sensor 206 in the jackpot state. The main controller 261 ends one round when the number of winning game balls B reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). The main controller 261 also ends one round when the blades 203a and 203b are opened and closed a predetermined number of times (18 times). In other words, the main controller 261, the number of times the blades 203a and 203b are opened (18 times), or the winning number of the game balls B (10 pieces), when either one reaches a predetermined number, one round game is played. is terminated, and this round game is continued up to the maximum round.

The main controller 261 returns the jackpot game state to the normal game state after the round game is played up to the maximum round, but it may be set to the game state with time reduction (time reduction state). In the time-saving state, until the number of times the blades 203a and 203b are opened reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 200 times) after the end of the jackpot state, the probability of the lottery result becoming "○" is increased and the variation display time is shortened. It becomes a game state.

Here, the determination result of the maximum round is displayed on the variable display device 60, but the variable display device 60 does not display whether or not the time-saving state occurs after the jackpot state game ends. If the game is played without knowing the game state after the end of the jackpot state, the player shoots the game ball aiming at both the left and right first start holes 33a. Even in this case, when it is found that the lottery results of "○" and "X" are likely to become "○" (when it is found that the second starter blades 33b1 and 33b2 are likely to open), after the big win state ends. By recognizing the game state as a time saving state, the shooting intensity of the game ball can be adjusted so as to aim at the left half of the game area 30a to aim at the second start port 33b and the through gate 34, but in the time saving state By the time it is recognized that there is, the game ball shot aiming at the right half of the game area 30a will be lost. Therefore, in this embodiment, during the big winning state (specifically, during the ending performance), a time saving state suggesting effect is executed to suggest whether or not the game state after the big winning state will become a time saving state. Execution of the time saving state suggestion effect is controlled by a time saving state suggestion flag provided in the RAM 553 of the sub-control device 262 in the same manner as the opening number of times suggestion effect described above.

With reference to FIG. 50, a specific example of the time-saving state suggesting effect, which is an example of the number-of-opening suggesting effect and the advantageous game state suggesting effect, will be described.

<An example of the number-of-releases suggestion effect>
In this example, 0 seconds to 3 seconds after the ball is detected at the first starting port 33a, after displaying the movie "bubbles in the sea" indicating the lottery for the opening pattern, the first opening pattern is displayed. In this case, a text image of "1 time open"("2 times open" in the case of the 2nd open pattern) is displayed in the bubble for 3 to 4 seconds (1 second) after the ball is detected. is executed.

The specific sound production period is set from 0 to 3 seconds after the detection of the entering ball. The first specific sound output possible period is set to 0 to 1 second after the entrance detection, the second specific sound output enable period is set to 1 to 2 seconds after the entrance detection, and the third specific sound The output possible period is set 2 to 3 seconds after the detection of the incoming ball. The first, second and third specific sound output periods are set to the same periods as the first, second and third specific sound output enabled periods. As for the display effect, when the depression of the effect button 80 is detected during either the first or second specific sound validity determination period, the specific sound is not output during the subsequent specific sound output period.

The image that informs the start of the specific sound effect may be displayed on the variable display device 60 at the same time as the ball is detected at the first starting port 33a, or may be displayed periodically during the game ball launch. Further, if it is predetermined that the number of times of opening is suggested by pressing the production button 80 when a squealing sound is heard, the image notifying the start of the specific sound production may not be displayed.

When the pressing of the production button 80 is detected at the timing t1 (0.5 seconds after the ball is detected) during the first specific sound validity determination period, the first opening is performed at the timing when the first specific sound output possible period ends. A suggestive effect is displayed on the variable display device 60 . In the first opening suggesting effect, either a one-time opening suggesting image or a two-time opening suggesting image, which will be described below, is displayed. The one-time opening suggestion image is an image in which a text image (first specific sound listening display image) such as “I heard it up to 19 kHz. Yes, displayed for 1 second. The twice-open suggesting image is an image in which the first specific sound listening display image is surrounded by a silver frame, and is displayed for one second. In this way, when the pressing of the effect button 80 is detected during the validity determination period of the first specific sound, the player displays the once-open suggesting image, the twice-open suggesting image, and the number of times of opening ("open once", It can be seen two seconds before the character image of "Open twice") is displayed.

When the pressing of the production button 80 is detected at the timing t2 (1.5 seconds after the detection of the entering ball) during the second specific sound validity determination period, the second opening is performed at the timing when the second specific sound output possible period ends. A suggestive effect is displayed on the variable display device 60 . In the second opening suggesting effect, either a one-time opening suggesting image or a two-time opening suggesting image, which will be described below, is displayed. The one-time opening suggestion image is an image in which a text image (second specific sound listening display image) such as “I heard it up to 17 kHz. Yes, displayed for 1 second. The twice-open suggesting image is an image in which the second specific sound listening display image is surrounded by a silver frame, and is displayed for one second. In this way, when the pressing of the effect button 80 is detected during the validity determination period of the second specific sound, the player displays the once-open suggesting image, the twice-open suggesting image, and the number of times of opening ("open once", It can be seen one second before the character image of "open twice") is displayed.

When the pressing of the production button 80 is detected at the timing t2 (2.5 seconds after the detection of the entering ball) during the third specific sound validity determination period, the third opening is performed at the timing when the third specific sound output possible period ends. A suggestive effect is displayed on the variable display device 60 . In the third opening suggesting effect, either a one-time opening suggesting image or a two-time opening suggesting image, which will be described below, is displayed. The one-time opening suggestion image is an image in which a character image (third specific sound listening display image) such as “I think you could hear up to 15 kHz” or “You are still normal” is surrounded by a gold frame. displayed for seconds. The twice-open suggesting image is displayed for one second by enclosing the third specific sound listening display image with a silver frame. In this way, when the pressing of the effect button 80 is detected during the validity determination period of the third specific sound, the 1-time opening suggesting image and the 2-time opening suggesting image display the number of times of opening ("1 time open", "2 times Since it is displayed at the same time as when the character image of "Open" is displayed, if the specific sound in the high frequency band cannot be heard, the advantage of the number of times of opening indication effect cannot be obtained.

As described above, in this embodiment, the player who can hear the specific sound having a higher frequency band can see the 1-time opening suggesting image and the 2-time opening suggesting image earlier. Therefore, even if the lottery result of the opening pattern is the first opening pattern (opening once), the game ball can enter the upper ball entrances 201a and 201b with time to spare.

<Example of time-saving state suggestion production>
The ending effect is executed for 3 seconds after the end of the jackpot round game. The specific sound effect period is set from 0 seconds to 3 seconds after the start of the ending effect. The first specific sound output possible period is set to 0 to 1 second after the start of the ending effect, the second specific sound output possible period is set to 1 to 2 seconds after the start of the ending effect, and the third specific sound The output possible period is set 2 seconds to 3 seconds after the start of the ending effect. The first, second and third specific sound output periods are set to the same periods as the first, second and third specific sound output enabled periods. Note that when the depression of the effect button 80 is detected during either the first or second specific sound validity determination period, the specific sound is not output during the subsequent specific sound output period.

When the pressing of the production button 80 is detected at the timing t4 (0.5 seconds after the start of the ending production) during the first specific sound validity determination period, the first time reduction at the timing when the first specific sound output possible period ends A suggestive effect is displayed on the variable display device 60 . The first time-reduction suggesting effect is the same as the first opening-suggestion effect, but the first specific sound may be output even when the time-reduction state is not attached. In this case, when the pressing of the effect button 80 is detected during the validity determination period of the first specific sound, the color of the frame surrounding the first specific sound listening image is set to black, suggesting that the image is not a time-saving suggestive image. do it. The same applies to the second and third specific sounds.

When the pressing of the production button 80 is detected at timing t4 (1.5 seconds after the start of the ending production) during the second specific sound validity determination period, the second time reduction is performed at the timing when the second specific sound output possible period ends. A suggestive effect is displayed on the variable display device 60 .

When the depression of the production button 80 is detected at timing t4 (2.5 seconds after the start of the ending production) during the third specific sound validity determination period, the third time reduction is performed at the timing when the third specific sound output possible period ends. A suggestive effect is displayed on the variable display device 60 .

As described above, in the present embodiment, the player who can hear the specific sound having a higher frequency band can see the time-saving suggestion image earlier. Therefore, before the start of the time-saving state, or at an early stage after the time-saving state starts, it is possible to know that the time-saving state is attached, so the right half of the game area 30a is recognized before it is recognized as the time-saving state. To reduce the extra loss of a game ball aimed and shot.

The display of the one-time opening suggesting image, the two-time opening suggesting image, and the time-saving suggesting image described above corresponds to notification of transition to the specific game state of the invention according to (E1). The once-opening suggestion flag, the twice-opening suggestion flag, and the time saving state suggestion flag described above correspond to the specific notification control means of the invention according to (E1).

<Effect of Example 5>
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, the audio frequency band (first specific sound: 19 kHz, second specific sound: 17 kHz, third specific sound: 15 kHz), the timing of notifying the opening of the blades 203a and 203b of the prize winning device 200, that is, the timing of two seconds before the number of times of opening is displayed. , 203b, or
There is a difference in whether the opening of the blades 203a and 203b is notified at the timing one second before the number of times of opening is displayed, or whether the opening of the blades 203a and 203b is notified at the same timing as the number of times of opening is displayed. The player who can hear the specific sound having a higher frequency band is notified of the opening of the blades 203a and 203b earlier. Therefore, since the player tries to recognize the higher audible frequency band as much as possible according to his/her age group, it is possible to improve the amusement of the presentation of notifying the opening of the wings 203a and 203b of the winning device 200.例文帳に追加can be done. In addition, instead of opening the blades 203a and 203b, it is possible to notify that a time-saving state will be attached after the end of the jackpot round.

The pachinko machine 10 of Example 6 will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 56. FIG. The gaming system described below can be applied to any pachinko machine 10 of the first to fifth embodiments described above.

FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram showing the outline of the game system of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing menu display processing by the sub-controller 262. As shown in FIG. FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing password input processing by the sub-controller 262 . FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing a game end code display process by the sub-controller 262. As shown in FIG. FIG. 55 shows a menu screen for a game linked to a game machine. FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing game machine-linked game server processing.

As shown in FIG. 51, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, game-related information and player-related information acquired in the game are read by the player's portable communication terminal via a QR code (registered trademark). When the mobile communication terminal of the player accesses the URL converted from the QR code (registered trademark), the information is stored in the server operated by the gaming machine manufacturer. A player can check the information stored in the server using the mobile communication terminal. In addition, the player enters the password issued by the server into the pachinko machine 10 and plays a game, so that the information about the player acquired in the previous game is reflected in the game played this time (hereinafter referred to as game machine interlocking game) can be performed. The game machine-linked game will be described below.

<Menu display processing>
A flowchart showing menu display processing by the sub-controller 262 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S5001, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the third pattern is being variably displayed on the third pattern display device . If the third symbol is not being variably displayed, the process proceeds to step S5002, and if the third symbol is being variably displayed, this processing ends.

In step S5002, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the jackpot state is in progress. If it is not in the jackpot state, the process proceeds to step S5003, and if it is in the jackpot state, this processing ends.

In step S5003, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not pressing of the effect button 80 has been detected. If pressing of the effect button 80 is detected, the process proceeds to step S5004; otherwise, the process ends.

In step S5004, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 causes the third symbol display device 42 to display a menu screen for a gaming machine-linked game, which will be described later. Specifically, the display control device 45 controls the third symbol display device 42 to display the menu screen for the game linked to the game machine.

As shown in FIG. 55(a), the menu screen for the game machine-linked game is provided with items of "start game", "end game", "new registration", and "close menu". , and the triangular cursor is positioned to the left of "Start game".

In step S5005, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not "start game" is selected from the menu items. If "start game" is selected, the process proceeds to step S5006; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S5008. FIG. 55(b) shows a menu screen when the player presses the effect button 80 once while the menu screen of FIG. 55(a) is being displayed. On the menu screen shown in FIG. 4(a), the item "start game" is selected.

In step S5006, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 displays information necessary for starting a game as a game start code. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 55(b), a game start code is displayed to the right of the menu item. The game start code is a QR code (registered trademark) that can convert password information required to start a game linked to a game machine into a character string in URL format together with the address of a server operated by a game machine maker. The game start code is read by a mobile communication terminal equipped with a reading function (barcode reader) and converted into URL format character information. When the player accesses the URL using the portable communication terminal, the server gives a password necessary for starting the game linked to the game machine. The display screen of the game start code is provided with a close button, and by pressing the effect button 80, the display screen of the game start code is closed to return to the menu screen.

In step S5007, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs password input processing.

<Password input process>
Password input processing by the sub-controller 262 will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S5101, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the game start code is displayed. If the game start code is displayed, the process proceeds to step S5102; otherwise, the process ends.

In step S5102, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the item "enter password" is selected. If the item "enter password" is selected, the process advances to step S5104; otherwise, the process advances to step S5103.

In step S5103, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the item "do not enter password" is selected. If the item "do not enter password" is selected, the process advances to step S5109; otherwise, steps S5102 and S5103 are repeated.

In step S5104, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 displays a password input screen. On the password input screen, alphabets, numbers, an enter button, a return button, etc. are displayed, and the cursor is moved by operating the selection buttons 71 to 74, and the production button 80 is pressed at the position where the cursors overlap. The alphabet or number with the cursor overlapped by is entered.

In step S5105, the CPU 551 of the sub-controller 262 determines whether or not a password has been entered. Specifically, if the decision button is pressed on the password input screen, the process advances to step S5106; otherwise, this processing is repeated until the decision button or the return button is pressed.

In step S5106, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs password authentication processing, and proceeds to step S5107. In step S5107, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 compares the entered password with the password pre-stored in the ROM 502 to determine whether the entered password is correct.

In step S5108, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs password reflection processing for reflecting the information included in the password in the game of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. The information contained in the password is information about the player that is stored on the server. The information about the player is information stored in the server, such as how high the specific sound can be heard in the above-described embodiment. If such information is reflected in the game of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to omit the process of checking again whether or not the player can hear the specific sound at what pitch in the game linked to the game machine after the reflection. be able to.

In step S5109, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the game-machine-linked game flag to "1", and terminates this process. As a result, the game machine-linked game is started.

Return to FIG. In step S5008, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the item "end game" has been selected on the menu screen. If "end game" is selected, the process proceeds to step S5009; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S5010.

In step S5009, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs game end code issuing processing.

<Game end code display processing>
The game end code display processing will be described with reference to FIG.

In step S5201, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the game end code display screen is displayed. If "end game" is selected and the game end code display screen is displayed, the process proceeds to step S5202; otherwise, the process ends.

In step S5202, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the gaming machine-linked game flag is "1". If the gaming machine interlocking game flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S5203, otherwise the process ends.

In step S5203, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 creates a game-machine-linked game ending code. The code for ending a game linked to the gaming machine includes information related to the game such as model information, date and time information, the number of big wins, the type of big win, the number of fluctuations and the type of fluctuation, etc., and the height of a specific sound that can be heard by the player. It is a QR code (registered trademark) in which information related to games, including information, is converted into a character string in URL format together with the address of a server operated by a game machine manufacturer. When the player accesses the URL using the portable communication terminal, the game-related information stored in the server is updated, and the updated game result can be confirmed. A close button is provided on the display screen of the code for ending the game linked to the game machine, and by pressing the performance button 80, the display screen of the code for ending the game linked to the game machine is closed and the menu screen is returned.

In step S5204, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 displays the generated game-machine-linked game end code, and ends this process.

The information about the game and the player transmitted to the server may be changed to the pitch of the specific audible sound, or other information may be sent along with the pitch of the specific audible sound. The other information is, for example, the pitch of the one-shot notification sound (first to third) in the first embodiment, and the type of reach promotion effect (A to C) in the second embodiment, In Example 3, it is the type (1st to 3rd) of the pre-reading notice effect, and in Example 4, it is the number of steps of the step-up notice effect and the type of step-up image (1st to 3rd), In the case of Example 5, it is the type (first to third) of the number of times of opening suggestion production and the time saving state suggestion production. By reading this information sent to the server, the game machine manufacturer can obtain information specific to the player who played the game (player's age group, auditory ability, attentiveness, interest in specific sound effects, etc.). etc.) can be grasped.

Return to FIG. In step S5010, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not "new registration" has been selected on the menu screen. If "new registration" is selected, the process proceeds to step S5011; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S5012.

In step S5011, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 displays the new registration code. The new registration code is a QR code (registered trademark) that can convert information to the effect that it is a new registration, model information related to the gaming machine 10, date and time information, etc., into a URL format character string together with the address of the server operated by the gaming machine manufacturer. ). When the player accesses the URL using the portable communication terminal, the player can check the screen provided in the server for recording the player's own game results. The display screen of the new registration code is provided with a close button, and by pressing the effect button 80, the display screen of the new registration code is closed and the screen returns to the menu screen.

In step S5012, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not "close menu" has been selected on the menu screen. If "close menu" is selected, the process proceeds to step S5013; otherwise, the process ends.

In step S5013, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 closes the menu screen and returns the screen display to the original game screen display.

<Game machine-linked game server processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the game machine-linked game server processing performed by the server operated by the game maker will be described.

In step S5301, the server determines whether or not there is an access from the mobile communication terminal of the player. If there is access, the process advances to step S5302; if there is no access, this process ends.

In step S5302, the server determines whether or not there is a game start request from the player's mobile communication terminal. Specifically, the server determines that there is a game start request when the server is accessed using a URL converted from the game start code. If there is a game start request, the process proceeds to step S5303; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S5304.

In step S5303, the server creates a password containing information about the player, and transmits the created password to the player's mobile communication terminal.

In step S5304, the server determines whether or not there is a game end request from the player's mobile communication terminal. Specifically, the server determines that there is a game end request when the server is accessed using the URL converted from the game end code. If there is a game end request, the process proceeds to step S5305; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S5308.

In step S5305, the server updates the information stored in the server based on the information on the game and the information on the player transmitted using the URL converted from the game end code.

In step S5306, the server performs ranking based on the updated number of times of jackpot, type of jackpot, number of times of change, type of change, and pitch of specific sound that can be heard. One of the merits of the player playing the game machine-linked game is the privilege image obtained according to the rank.

In step S5307, the server updates the display information displayed on the player's mobile communication terminal based on the updated information. As a result, the player can check the game result of the day, the rank based on the game result, and the privilege image.

In step S5308, the server determines whether or not there is a new registration request from the player's mobile communication terminal. Specifically, the server determines that a new registration request has been made when the server is accessed using the URL converted from the new registration code. If there is a new registration request, the process advances to step S5309; otherwise, the process ends.

In step S5309, based on the new registration request, the server secures an area necessary for the game machine-linked game played by the player in the server.

<Effect of Example 6>
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, the audible frequency band (first specific sound: 19 kHz, second Specific sound: 17 kHz, third specific sound: 15 kHz) and the mode of production based on the grasp of the audible frequency band, for example, in the first embodiment, the height of the one-shot notification sound (first 1 to 3), the types of reach promotion effects (A to C) in Example 2, the types of pre-reading notice effects (1st to 3rd) in Example 3, and the number of steps of step-up notice effects in Example 4 ( 1st to 3rd), in Example 5, it is possible to transmit information related to the game such as the timing of the opening number suggesting effect and the time saving state suggesting effect to the gaming machine maker. The game machine manufacturer uses the transmitted audio frequency band and the like to extract information specific to the player who has played the game on the pachinko machine 10 (player's age group, auditory power, attentiveness, interest in specific sound effects, etc.). can be investigated. As a result, the game machine maker can suitably investigate the information specific to the player who has played the game on the pachinko machine 10 without waiting for the pachinko machine 10 to be collected.

The pachinko machine 10 of Embodiment 7 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60. FIG. 57 is a front view of the game board 30 of the pachinko machine 10 of Embodiment 7. FIG. FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining the game area of the game board 30. As shown in FIG. FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the first right game area 30c1. FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the second right game area 30c2.

The game board 30 of the seventh embodiment has a game area 30c different from the game area 30a described in the first embodiment. Specifically, the game area 30c of Example 7 is configured to perform a right-handed game in which a game ball is shot with a right-handed hit during the jackpot state. The game area 30c will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 57, in the game board 30 of the seventh embodiment, a center frame 47 is provided in the center of the game area 30c. A region 30d is formed.

As shown in FIG. 58, the right game area 30r is formed on the right side of the right outer edge portion 47rr including the right wall 47r of the center frame 47. As shown in FIG. The right game area 30r is an area surrounded by a dashed line in FIG. The right outer edge portion 47rr is a portion of the outer edge of the center frame 47 that is in contact with the dashed line. The right wall 47r is a portion of the right outer edge portion 47rr that is in contact with the thick dashed line.

The left game area 30l is formed on the left side of the left outer edge 47ll including the left wall 47l of the center frame 47. As shown in FIG. The left game area 30l is an area surrounded by a chain double-dashed line in FIG. The left outer edge portion 47ll is a portion of the outer edge of the center frame 47 that is in contact with the chain double-dashed line. The left wall 47l is a portion of the left outer edge portion 47ll that contacts the thick two-dot chain line.

Specifically, the upstream end of the right game area 30r is provided from the right side of the center line CL that bisects the width of the game area 30c, and the upstream end of the left game area 30l is provided from the left side of this center line CL. . The downstream end of the right side game area 30r is a position where the game ball flowing down from the left side game area 30l cannot reach. The downstream end of the left side game area 30l is a position where the game ball that has flowed down from the right side game area 30r cannot reach. Note that the center frame 47 has a width of the right frame narrower than that of the center frame 47 of the first embodiment in order to leave a wider game area (right game area 30r) than the first embodiment on the right side thereof.

A lower game area 30d is formed below the lower edge 47d of the center frame 47 in the game area 30c. The lower game area 30d is provided at a position where both the game ball that has flowed down the right game area 30r and the game ball that has flowed down the left game area 30l can reach. Note that the lower game area 30d is an area surrounded by broken lines in FIG. A lower edge portion 47d is a portion of the outer edge of the center frame 47 that is in contact with this dashed line.

The right wall 47r and the left wall 47l protrude from the surface of the game area 30c to the same height as the nail 39, and when a game ball flowing down the right game area 30r or the left game area 30l collides, it is an obstacle that bounces back. function as On the other hand, the right outer edge portion 47rr except for the right wall 47r, the left outer edge portion 47ll except for the left wall 47l, and the lower edge portion 47d are aligned at substantially the same height as the surface of the game area 30c. Therefore, the game ball that collides with the nail 39 planted along the right outer edge portion 47rr, the left outer edge portion 47ll, and the lower edge portion 47d moves left and right along the lower edge of the third symbol display device 42 inside the center frame 47. In some cases, it jumps into the stage 47s (rolling area) extending in the direction.

The right game area 30r includes a first right area 30r1 provided along walls 55 and 56 formed on the outer rail 52 and the inner frame 12 corresponding to the right outer edge of the game area 30c, A branch rail 401 is provided to separate the first right side area 30r1 and the second right side area 30r2 provided between the right outer edge portion 47rr of the center frame 47 . Note that the first right game area 30r1 is an area shaded upward to the right shown in FIG. 58, and the second right game area 30r2 is an area shaded upward to the left shown in FIG. A game ball shot to the right flows down the first right side game area 30r1 when the shooting momentum is strong, but flows down the second right side game area 30r2 when the shooting momentum is weaker. Thereby, the player can select whether to let the game ball flow down to the first right side game area 30r1 or to let the game ball flow down to the second right side game area 30r2 by the game ball shooting operation.

In addition, the right game area 30r is positioned below the downstream end of the branch rail 401 so that game balls flowing down the first right game area 301 and game balls flowing down the second right game area 30r2 can enter. A variable winning device 32 is provided. The game ball enters the variable winning device 32 even if the game ball is shot aiming at either the first right game area 30r1 or the second right game area 30r2. However, it takes longer for the game ball flowing down the second right side game area 30r2 to enter the variable winning device 32 than the game ball flowing down the first right side game area 30r1. This is because game parts (accessories) such as pinwheels 37 and nails 39 for variously changing the flowing direction of the game ball are arranged in the second right side area 30r2, but in the first right side game area 30r1 This is because these accessories are not provided. As a result, the player can play a game with a difference in the jackpot digestion time between when playing a game in the first right side game area 30r1 and when playing a game in the second right side game area 30r2.

Since no accessories are arranged in the first right game area 30r1, the game balls launched into the first right game area 30r1 during the jackpot state are excluded from entering the variable winning device 32 during the interval period. , the ball enters the variable winning device 32 . On the other hand, before some of the game balls launched into the second right game area 30r2 during the jackpot state enter the variable winning device 32, the flow direction is changed to the direction of the lower game area 30d. Therefore, it is difficult for the ball to enter the variable winning device 32 . Therefore, the second right side game area 30r2 is more likely to start the first round than to shoot the game ball to the first right side game area 30r1 during the jackpot game state. It takes a long time to digest the jackpot from to the end of the final round. As a result, the player can play the game in the jackpot game state for a long time when aiming at the second right game area 30r2.

In addition, although the second right game area 30r2 takes longer than the first right game area 30r1 to digest the jackpot, there are game parts (accessories) such as the general winning opening 31 in which prize balls are paid out when the ball enters the game area. Therefore, a profit that cannot be obtained in the first right game area 30r1 can be obtained. As a result, in the jackpot game state, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player who tries to play the game aiming at the second right side game area 30r2, which takes longer time than the first right side game area 30r1.

Next, the board structure of the second right game area 30r2 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. FIG.

The second right side game area 30r2 changes the flowing direction of some of the game balls flowing down the second right side game area 30r2 during the jackpot game state to a direction in which the ball can enter the general winning opening 31. and a plurality of nails 39b and 39d planted in the variable winning device 32 to change the direction in which it is difficult to enter the ball. second flow direction changing units 405a and 405c (collectively referred to as the second flow direction changing unit 405).

The direction in which the ball is difficult to enter the variable winning device 32 is the direction in which the ball can enter the first starting port 33a in the case of the second flow-down direction changing portion 405a constituted by the nail 39b, which is constituted by the nail 39d. If it is the second flow direction changing portion 405c, it is the direction in which the ball can be entered through the out port . In this way, as the number of game balls whose flowing direction is changed to the direction other than the variable winning device 32 increases, it becomes more difficult for the ball to enter the variable winning device 32, so that the jackpot digestion time can be further lengthened. On the other hand, since the falling direction of the game ball is changed to the first start port 33a by the peg 39b of the second flow direction changing portion 405a, it is possible to obtain a profit based on the ball entering the first start port 33a. can. In some cases, the flowing direction of the game ball may be changed to the second starting port 33b instead of the first starting port 33a. The benefit based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33a or the second starting hole 33b is that the payout of prize balls and the number of reserve balls increase.

In addition, the second right game area 30r2 changes the flowing direction of some of the game balls that have passed through the left and right sides of the general winning opening 31 to the direction of the lower game area 30d by the second flow direction changing unit 405. Before being changed to , the variable winning device 32 is provided with a third flow direction changing portion 407 composed of a nail 39e planted in a shape to change the direction in which it is easy to hit the ball. In this way, by increasing the number of game balls whose flowing direction is changed in the direction of the variable winning device 32, it becomes easier to enter the variable winning device 32, so the relationship with the jackpot digestion time in the first right side game area 30r1 , it is possible to extend the jackpot digestion time in the second right game area 30r2 to an optimum length.

In addition, the second right game area 30r2 adjusts the ease with which a ball can enter the variable winning device 32 and the ease with which a ball can enter a winning device other than the variable winning device 32, so that it takes a long time to complete the jackpot. , the same profits (prize balls) as in the case of playing a game in the first right game area 30r1 during one jackpot state.

Specifically, the probability of entering the variable winning device 32 among the game balls flowing down the second right side game area 30r2 during the jackpot gaming state (hereinafter referred to as the second winning rate) is the first right side during the jackpot gaming state. It is set lower than the probability that the game balls flowing down the game area 30r1 will land in the variable winning device 32 (hereinafter referred to as the second winning rate). For example, the first winning rate is about 100% and the second winning rate is about 60%.

In order to compensate for the low second winning rate, in the second right side game area 30r2, among the game balls flowing down the second right side game area 30r2 during the jackpot game state, the first flow direction changing unit 403 is about 13%, and the second flow direction changing unit 405 changes the flow direction to the direction of the first starting port 33a and the out port 36. The percentage of game balls that are changed to 27%.

As a result, the game ball is shot to the second right side game area 30r2 rather than the first right side game area 30r1 where stable ball entry to the variable winning device 32 can be expected, and the game ball is shot to the general winning opening 31 or the first start opening 31a. This increases the player's willingness to play to obtain a prize ball or hold based on the number of incoming balls.

Next, prize balls won by the player in the jackpot game state will be described.

Here, it is assumed that there are 15 rounds in the jackpot gaming state, and the number of detected game balls (count number) required for one round to advance to the next round is 10 counts. It is assumed that the variable winning device 32 pays out 11 big winning balls per count. The number of prize balls to be paid out per one count from the normal prize winning port 31 is three. 100 game balls are shot in 60 seconds (0.6 seconds per ball). Also, the interval time between rounds (the time during which the variable winning device 32 is in the closed state) is sufficiently shorter than the game ball shooting interval, and it is assumed that the game ball is not lost. .

In the game performed in the first right game area 30r1 in the jackpot game state, 150 balls must be shot by the end of the 15th round. In this case, the profit (difference ball) obtained by the player is the number of winning balls x the number of counts x the number of rounds - the number of shots, and (11 [balls/count] x 10 [count] x 15 [rounds] - 150 [balls]) = 1500 balls. Also, the jackpot digestion time in the first right gaming area 30r1 is 150 [balls]×0.6 [seconds/ball]=90 seconds.

On the other hand, in the game performed in the second right game area 30r2 in the jackpot game state, 250 balls are required to be shot by the end of the fifteenth round. Of these, 33 balls have entered the normal prize winning opening 31, but no balls have entered the first starting opening 33a. In this case, the profit (difference ball) obtained by the player is (number of prize balls for large prizes x number of counts x number of rounds - number of shots) + (number of prize balls for normal prizes x number of counts), (11 [balls /count]×10 [count]×15 [round]−250 [ball])+(3 [ball/count]×33 [count])=1400 balls+99 balls=1499 balls. Also, the jackpot digestion time in the second right gaming area 30r2 is 250 [balls]×0.6 [seconds/ball]=150 seconds.

As described above, in the case of playing a game in the second right side game area 30r2 in the jackpot game state, the time required to complete the jackpot is longer than in the case of playing a game in the first right side game area 30r1. There is not much difference in the profit (difference ball) that the player can obtain regardless of which of the second right game areas 30r2 is used. Therefore, if the player wants to end the jackpot game state quickly, he/she performs a right-handed game aiming at the first right side game area 30r1 during the jackpot game state, but if he/she wants to enjoy the jackpot game state for a long time, the player wants to enjoy the jackpot game state. Even if the second right game area 30r2 is aimed at during the right-handed game, the same degree of profit as the first right game area 30r1 can be obtained. can reduce the disadvantage of

In addition, when playing a game in the first right side game area 30r1, the player only follows the game ball flowing down during the jackpot game state up and down along the branch rail 401, but the second right side game area. When a game is played in 30r2, it is possible to visually enjoy the course of the game balls flowing down while changing the flow direction to the left and right by the pegs 39 arranged in the second right game area 30r2.

In addition, the player can select a game in the first right game area 30r1 or a game in the second right game area 30r2 simply by adjusting the right-handed shooting operation, and the game ball can be thrown during the jackpot game state. It is also possible to change the firing destination from the first right game area 30r1 to the second right game area 30r2, or from the second right game area 30r2 to the first right game area 30r1. Therefore, it is possible to increase the options of the right-handed game during the jackpot game state.

The above-described first right side game area 30r1 corresponds to the first right side area of the present invention, and the above-described second right side game area 30r2 corresponds to the second right side area of the present invention. The variable prize winning device 32 described above corresponds to the specific ball entry means of the present invention, and the general prize winning port 31 and the first start port 33a and the second start port 33b correspond to the game value imparting means of the present invention. The first flow direction changing section 403 and the second flow direction changing section 405 described above correspond to the flow direction changing means of the present invention. The above-described first flow direction changing section 403 corresponds to the first flow direction changing means of the present invention, and the above-described second flow direction changing section 405 corresponds to the second flow direction changing means of the present invention. The center frame 47 described above corresponds to the first game component of the present invention, and the branch rail 401 described above corresponds to the second game component of the present invention. Further, the above-described general prize-winning port 31 corresponds to the prize-winning means of the present invention, and the above-described first starting port 33a corresponds to the first starting opportunity generating means.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, the right side game area 30r provided on the right side of the center line CL that halves the width of the game area 30c is the first right side game area 30r1. and a second right game area 30r2. The first right game area 30r1 is provided along the right outer edge of the right game area 30r, and the second right game area 30r2 is provided on the left side of the first right game area 30r1. Therefore, a game ball shot to the right flows down the first right side game area 30r located on the outer edge side of the right side game area 30r when the shooting momentum is strong, but if the shooting momentum is weaker than the first It flows down the second right side game area 30r2 located inside the right side game area 30r1. The variable winning device 32 in which a jackpot game state in which round games are performed a predetermined number of times is generated is a position where a game ball flowing down the first right side game area 30r1 and a game ball flowing down the second right side game area 30r2 can enter. , the game ball enters the variable winning device 32 regardless of whether the game ball is aimed at the first right game area 30r1 or the second right game area 30r2. The general prize winning port 31 gives a prize ball when a game ball flowing down the second right game area 30r2 enters, so that the player can receive a profit different from the profit obtained by the variable prize winning device 32. give to

The game ball shot aiming at the second right side game area 30r2 during the big win game state flows down toward the variable prize winning device 32, but among the game balls flowing down the second right side game area 30r2 during the big win game state The flow-down direction of some game balls is changed by the first flow-down direction changing unit 403 to a direction in which the ball can enter or pass through the general winning hole 31 . Therefore, in the jackpot game state, the variable winning device 32 is more likely to hit the second right game area 30r2 than to hit the first right game area 30r1. Since the time until reaching the variable prize winning device 32 is lengthened by the change of the flowing direction to the other direction, the time until the predetermined number of round games is completed can be lengthened, and the first right side game area 30r1. It is possible to obtain prize balls that cannot be obtained with Therefore, even when the jackpot game state is executed by hitting to the right, if the player shoots the game ball aiming at the second right game area 30r2, the game ball is shot aiming at the first right game area 30r1. It is possible to play the game in the jackpot game state for a longer time, and to obtain prize balls that cannot be obtained in the first right game area 30r1. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the jackpot game state in the right-handed game.

In this embodiment, the second right game area 30r2 is provided with a through gate 34 in place of the normal winning opening 31 of the seventh embodiment, and the second game area 30d is located at a position different from that of the seventh embodiment. A starting port 33b is provided. This point will be mainly described below.

The board configuration of the game board 30 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. FIG. FIG. 61 is a front view of the game board 30 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment. FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the flow of game balls in the second right game area 30r2 of the eighth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 61, in the second right game area 30r2, a through gate 34 through which game balls can pass is arranged at a height position approximately equal to the right corner of the third symbol display device 42. . In the lower game area 30d, the first starting opening 33a is arranged at the same position as in the seventh embodiment, but unlike the seventh embodiment, the lower right side of the first starting opening 33a (lower game area 30d), a second start opening having second start opening blades 33b1 and 33b2 that operate between an open state in which game balls are easy to enter and a closed state in which game balls are more difficult to enter than in the open state. 33b is provided.

As shown in FIG. 62, the game ball flowing down the second right region 30r2 passes through the inside of the through gate 34 or the left and right sides of the through gate 34. As shown in FIG. About half of the game balls flowing down the second right area 30r2 pass through the through gate 34, as will be described later. Some of the game balls that have passed through the through gate 34 enter the variable winning device 32 if the variable winning device 32 is open, and if the variable winning device 32 is closed, the direction of the lower game area 30d. flow down to If the second starting port 33b is in an open state, there is a case where some of the game balls that have not been changed in flow to the variable winning device 32 enter the second starting port 33b.

A nail is planted on the left side of the second starting port 33b so as to change the traveling direction of at least a part of the game balls flowing down the left side game area 30l to a direction in which it is difficult for the balls to enter the second starting port 33b. 39h is provided. Therefore, a game ball shot aiming at the left game area 30l is less likely to enter the second starting hole 33b and more often enters the out hole 36.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the game ball is shot aiming at the second right game area 30r2, it is easy to enter the second starting hole 33b. It should be noted that the fourth flow direction changing unit 407 may not allow the game ball flowing down the left side game area 30l to enter the second starting port 33b at all.

Next, the relationship between the second right game area 30r2 and the game state will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. FIG.

As in the description of the first embodiment, the first symbol (for example, special symbol) as identification information is changed to the first symbol display triggered by the winning of the first starting port 33a and the second starting port 33b. In addition to being performed by the device 40, the variable display of the third pattern (for example, decorative pattern) as the identification information is performed by the third pattern display device 42. FIG. When the variable display of the first pattern and the third pattern results in a winning result, in the variable winning device 32, the opening and closing operation of opening and closing the opening and closing door 32b in the open state and the closed state of the opening and closing door 32b is performed a predetermined number of times (round S) Transition to the jackpot game state to be performed, and after the jackpot game state ends, the probability that the variable display will be the winning result shifts to a normal game state or a high probability variable state.

Using passage through the through gate 34 as a trigger, the second symbol display device 41 performs a variable display of a second symbol (for example, a normal symbol) as identification information. When the variable display of the second symbols stops for a predetermined symbol (for example, a "○" symbol), the second starter blades 33b1 and 33b2 are opened for a predetermined period of time.

The through gate 34 is set to have a high probability of stopping the "○" symbol in this embodiment. For example, the through gate 34 in this embodiment is set so that the "o" symbol stops at a probability of 1/100. Here, as in the seventh embodiment, when a game is played in the second right game area 30r2 during the jackpot game state, 250 game balls are required to be shot by the end of the final round. Then, since about 125 game balls pass through the through gate 34 during the jackpot game state, there is an opportunity to open the second starting port 33b by stopping the "○" symbol at least once during the jackpot game state. Occur.

As shown in FIG. 62, the second right side game area 30r2 is configured such that the flowing direction of some of the game balls flowing down the second right side game area 30r2 during the jackpot state is the direction in which it is easy to pass through the through gate 34. It is provided with a first flow direction changing portion 403 composed of a plurality of nails 39f implanted in a shape changing to . About half of the game balls flowing down the second right game area 30r2 pass through the through gate 34 by the nail 39f.

In addition, the second right game area 30r2 changes the flowing direction of some game balls out of the game balls that have passed through the through gate 34 to a direction in which it is difficult for them to enter the variable winning device 32. A second flow-down direction changing part composed of a plurality of nails 39g planted in such a way as to change a part of the game ball changed to a direction in which it is difficult to hit the ball into a direction in which the ball can enter the second starting port 33b. 405d.

As a result, the player plays a game aiming at the second right side game area 30r2, thereby obtaining a profit based on the ball entering the second starting hole 33b, which cannot be obtained in the first right side game area 30r1. . Since the second starting port 33b is opened for a predetermined time, it is possible to enter a plurality of game balls into the second starting port 33b during the open time. The profit based on the ball entering the second starting port 33b is the payout of prize balls and the increase in reserve.

Therefore, when the player does not have enough time to play the game, the player often shoots the game ball aiming at the first right game area 30r1. In many cases, the game ball is shot aiming at the second right game area 30r2, which is expected to enter the starting hole 33b.

In this way, even when the same right hitting game is performed in the jackpot game state, when aiming at the first right side game area 30r1, only aiming at the ball entering the variable winning device 32, but aiming at the second right side game area 30r2. In this case, the profit can be expected to be added by stopping the variable display of the second symbol at the "○" symbol. Therefore, since the games are different between the first right game area 30r1 and the second right game area 30r2, it is possible to reduce the player's boredom.

In addition, the game ball shot aiming at the second right side game area 30r2 not only enters the variable winning device 32 disposed in the second right side game area 30r2, but also does not enter the variable winning device 32. Since the game ball may enter the second starting hole 33b arranged in the lower game area 30d, even if the ball does not enter the variable winning device 32, the player's motivation can be maintained. Game areas other than the second right game area 30r2 can also be actively utilized.

The above-described second starting port blades 33b1 and 33b2 correspond to the action members of the present invention, and the second starting port 33b corresponds to the game value imparting means and the second starting opportunity generating means of the present invention. The gate 34 corresponds to the game ball passage detection means of the present invention.

In Embodiments 7 and 8, the general prize winning port 31 and the through gate 34 corresponding to the game value giving means are provided in the second right side game area 30r2. is not provided in the second right game area 30r2.

The board configuration of the game board 30 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64. FIG. 63 is a front view of the game board 30 of the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment. FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the flow of game balls in the second right game area 30r2.

As shown in FIG. 63, the second right side game area 30r2 is the first starting port 33a in which some of the game balls flowing down the second right side game area 30r2 are disposed in the lower side game area 30d. It has a warp passage component 47w corresponding to the guiding means for guiding to the

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64, some of the game balls flowing down the second right game area 30r2 can enter the right wall 47r of the center frame 47, and the entering ball A warp passage component 47w is provided to guide the game ball that has been played to the first starting port 33a. The warp passage component 47w is provided with a warp entrance 47wa into which a game ball can enter at a portion protruding from the outer surface of the right wall 47r, and a game ball passing through the warp passage 47wc is discharged to the inner surface of the right wall 47r. A warp exit 47wb is provided. The warp passage component 47w is configured so that the game ball discharged from the warp exit 47wb swings left and right on the stage 47s and then easily enters the discharge entrance 47sa.

The stage 47s is formed by a series of peaks and valleys in the left-right direction, and after rolling a game ball that has flowed into the center frame 47 for several seconds, the stage 47s discharges it forward or is provided on the back side of the center. The ball is entered into the discharge inlet 47sa. A game ball ejected forward enters the out port 36 with a high probability unless it is ejected from directly above the first starting port 33a. A game ball that enters the discharge entrance 47sa has peaks and valleys so that it is easier to stop rocking at the center of the stage 47s than a game ball that jumps into the stage 47s from the nail 39b around the stage 47s. adjusted. Further, since a recessed groove is formed toward the back side at the center of the stage 47s, a game ball that has stopped rocking at the center of the stage 47s can easily enter the ejection inlet 47sa.

The game ball entering the discharge entrance 47sa passes below the stage 47s and is discharged from the discharge exit 47sb that opens to the game area 30 . Since the game ball discharged from the discharge exit 47sb is located directly above the first starting hole 33a, it is easy to enter the first starting hole 33a. In this way, the warp passage component 47w is configured to first guide a game ball entered into the warp entrance 47wa to the stage 47s, and guide it to the first starting port 33a via the stage 47s.

In the second right side game area 30r2, some of the game balls flowing down the second right side game area 30r2 during the jackpot game state can enter the warp inlet 47wb of the warp passage component 47w in the flowing direction. It has a first flow direction changing part 403 composed of a nail 39h implanted in a direction changing shape. Some of the game balls flowing down the second right game area 30r2 are guided to the lower game area 30d by the warp passage component 47w, and the first starting port disposed in the lower game area 30d. It is possible to enter the ball in 33a.

Therefore, the player who selects the second right game area 30r2 and causes the game ball to flow down can be given an advantage that cannot be obtained in the first right game area 30r1. Further, when the game ball is shot aiming at the second right game area 30r2, the game ball is swung to the stage 47s other than the second right game area 30r2, or the game ball is made to flow down to the lower game area 30d. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get tired of the jackpot game state in the right-handed game.

The lower game area 30d described above corresponds to the third game area of the present invention, and the warp passage component 47w described above corresponds to the guiding means of the present invention.

In the seventh embodiment, the second right game area 30r2 is configured so that the same profit (prize ball) can be obtained as in the case of playing a game in the first right game area 30r1 during one jackpot state. As described above, the second right gaming area 30r2 may be configured to provide more profit (prize balls) than when playing in the first right gaming area 30r1 during one jackpot condition.

The board configuration of the game board 30 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a front view of the game board 30 of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment.

The second right side game area 30r2 of the game board 30 of the present embodiment has a plurality of tiles planted so as to change the direction in which the ball is more likely to enter the general winning opening 31 than the first flow direction changing portion of the seventh embodiment. It has a first flow-down direction changing portion 403a constituted by a nail 39a. That is, in the second right game area 30r2 of the present embodiment, among the game balls flowing down the second right game area 30r2 during the jackpot game state, the first flow direction changing unit 403 causes the flowing direction to enter the general winning opening 31. The percentage of game balls that are changed in the direction in which the ball can be thrown is greater than in the seventh embodiment.

Compared with the ease of entering the other general prize winning openings 31, the general winning opening 31 arranged in the second right side game area 30r2 is easier than the general winning opening 31 arranged in the left side game area 30l. A nail 39a is planted so that a game ball can easily enter.

As a result, in the second right side game area 30r2 of the present embodiment, it takes longer than the first right side game area 30r1 to digest the big hit, but since it is easier for the game ball to enter the general winning hole 31, one It is possible to obtain more profits (prize balls) than in the case of playing a game in the first right game area 30r1 during the jackpot game state. Similarly, with respect to the profit (ball difference) that the player can obtain in one big win game state, the profit (difference ball) that the player can obtain in one big win game state in Example 7 ( difference ball) can be acquired.

Therefore, as long as the player has enough time to play the game, the original profit (variable winning (Profit based on winning to device 12) and additional profit (profit based on winning to general winning opening 31) can be obtained. In addition, if the player does not have enough time to play the game, the original profit that can be obtained during the jackpot game state in a short time by shooting the game balls aiming at the first right side game area 30r1 during the jackpot game state. (Profit based on winning to variable winning device 12) can be obtained. As a result, whether the player has enough time to play the game or not, the amusement of the jackpot state in the right-handed game can be improved.

In the embodiments 7 to 10, the configuration in which the first right side game area 30r1 and the second right side game area 30r2 are divided in the jackpot game state was described as an example, but in the jackpot game state, the left side game area 30l and the right side game area 30r may be used.

The board configuration of the game board 30 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a front view of the game board 30 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment.

The game board 30 of this embodiment can enter the variable winning device 32 even if the game ball is aimed at any one of the first right game area 30r1, the second right game area 30r2, and the left game area 30l. It is configured as

Specifically, since the variable winning device 32 of this embodiment is arranged substantially in the center of the lower game area 33d, the first right game area 30r1, the second right game area 30r2, and the left game area 30l Any game ball that has flowed down can enter the variable winning device 32. - 特許庁In order to achieve this, the first right game area 30r1 changes the flow direction of the game ball that has flowed down the passage formed by the branch rail 401 to a direction in which the ball can enter the variable winning device 32. It has a third flow-down direction changing part 407 composed of a nail 39l implanted in the bottom. One general prize winning opening 31 is arranged in the second right game area 30r2.

The left game area 30l is provided with one through gate 34 and two general prize winning openings 31 downstream thereof. In addition, the left side game area 30l includes a fourth flow direction changing portion 409 composed of a nail 39m planted in such a manner as to change the flow direction of the game ball so that it can pass through the through gate 34, and a through gate 34. It is composed of a nail 39n planted in such a manner as to change the flowing direction of a game ball passing through the gate 34 or its left or right side to the direction in which the ball can enter either of the two general winning holes 31. The fifth flow direction changing part 411 and the flow direction of the game ball passing through the through gate 34 or its left or right side can be entered into either the first start port 33a or the second start port 33b. and a sixth flow direction changing portion 413 composed of a nail 39o implanted in a direction changing shape.

Directly above the variable winning device 32, the lower game area 33d is provided with a first starting port 33a and a second starting port 33b. The first starting port 33a can be entered by shooting a game ball aiming at any of the second right side game area 30r2 and the left side game area 30l. On the other hand, the through gate 34, which serves as a trigger for opening the second starting port 33b, is arranged only in the left side game area 30l, so the second starting port 33b aims at the left side game area 30l and the game ball. If you don't shoot, you won't enter the ball.

The profit (prizing balls) obtained in one jackpot game state differs between the first right game area 30r1, the second right game area 30r2, and the left game area 30l. That is, when the game ball is shot aiming at the first right game area 30r1, the winning ball based on the ball entering the variable winning device 32 is obtained. When the game ball is shot aiming at the second right game area 30r2, the prize ball based on the ball entering the variable prize winning device 32 is added to the prize ball based on the ball entering the general winning hole 31. There is also an increase in prize balls and reserves based on balls entering the first starting port 33b. When a game ball is shot aiming at the left game area 30l, the prize balls based on the balls entering the variable prize winning device 32 are added with the prize balls based on the balls entering the two general prize winning openings 31. , an increase in prize balls and reserves based on balls entering the first starting port 33a, and a second starting that is open when the result of the lottery based on passing through the through gate 34 is a stop of the "○" symbol. There is also an increase in prize balls and reserves based on balls entering the port 34b.

As a result, when the game ball is shot aiming at the left game area 30l, it takes longer than when the game ball is shot at the first right game area 30r2 or the second right game area 30r2. , the most prize balls can be obtained, and there are many opportunities to increase the reserve. In addition, when the game ball is shot aiming at the second right side game area 30r2, it takes longer than when the game ball is shot at the first right side game area 30r1. You can win a lot of prize balls and have the opportunity to increase your reserves. Also, when the game ball is shot aiming at the first right game area 30r1, the extra prize ball cannot be expected, but the jackpot digestion time can be minimized. Thus, the player can hit the first right game area 30r1, the second right game area 30r2, and the left game area 30l separately in consideration of the time that can be spent on the game, and hit the jackpot in the optimum state. Since the game can be executed in the state, the interest in the big win state can be improved.

The first right game area 30r1 and the second right game area 30r2 described above correspond to the first area of the present invention, and the left game area 30l corresponds to the second area of the present invention. The two general winning openings 31 and the through gate 34 provided in the left side game area 30l and the first start opening 33a and the second start opening 33b provided in the lower game area 33d are the main It corresponds to the game value giving means of the invention. The fourth flow direction changing section 409, the fifth flow direction changing section 411, and the sixth flow direction changing section 413 described above correspond to the flow direction changing means of the present invention.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment, in the gaming machine provided with the game area 30c in which game balls flow down, the game area 30c includes at least the first right game area 30r1 and the first game area 30r1. It is composed of a second right game area 30r2 provided to the left of the right game area 30r1 and a left game area 30l provided to the left of the second right game area 30r2. In the game area 30c, when the result of the lottery based on the establishment of the starting condition is a jackpot result, the game balls flowing down the first right side game area 30r1, the game balls flowing down the second right side game area 30r2, and the left side game area 30l. A variable winning device 32 having a big winning opening 32a provided at a position where a game ball flowing down can enter. The second right side game area 30r2 is provided with one general prize winning opening 31 that gives a predetermined game value when a game ball flowing down the second right side game area 30r2 enters. The second right side game area 30r2 changes the flowing direction of some of the game balls flowing down the second right side game area 30r2 during the jackpot game state to the direction in which the ball can be entered into one general winning opening 31. A first flow direction changing portion 403 for changing and a second flow direction changing portion 405 for changing a direction in which a ball can be entered into the first starting port 33a are provided. The left game area 30l is provided with two general prize winning openings 31 and a through gate 34 for giving a predetermined game value when a game ball flowing down the left game area 30l enters or passes. The left side game area 30l has a fourth flow direction changer 409 that changes the flow direction of some of the game balls flowing down the left side game area 30l during the jackpot game state to a direction that allows passage through the through gate 34. , a fifth flow direction changing part 411 that changes the direction in which a ball can be entered into either of the two general winning holes 31, and a ball can be entered into either the first start hole 33a or the second start hole 33b. and a sixth downstream direction changing unit 413 that changes the direction.

As a result, even when the jackpot game state is executed, if the player shoots the game ball aiming at the left side game area 30l, the flow direction changing means (fourth flow direction change means) provided more than the second right side game area 30r2 The first right side game area 30r1 and the second right side game area 30r1 and the second right side game area 30r1 are changed by the change unit 409, the fifth flow direction change unit 411, and the sixth flow direction change unit 413). A game can be played in a jackpot game state for a longer time than when the game ball is aimed at the game area 30r2, and prize balls and reserves that cannot be obtained in the first right side game area 30r1 and the second right side game area 30r2 are held. It is also possible to obtain an increase in As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the jackpot gaming state.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and may be modified to achieve the same effect, for example, as described below.

<1> In the first embodiment described above, the specific sounds output during the specific sound production period are of three types, ie, the first to third specific sounds. Two types, such as a specific sound and a third specific sound, may be used.

<2> In the specific sound effect of the first embodiment described above, the first to third specific sound listening images are displayed based on detection of pressing of the effect button 80 within the first to third specific sound validity determination periods. However, the first to third specific sound listening images do not correspond to the pitch of the specific sound that the player could hear, but simply within the first to third specific sound validity determination period. It may be based on detection of pressing of the effect button 80 . For example, the first to third specific sound listening images are based on the fact that the depression of the effect button 80 is detected within the first to third specific sound validity determination period, and the player's response is "Well heard!" It may be a message image for praising. Also, along with the message image, a privilege image that the player wants to see next time may be displayed. The privilege image may be an image suggesting the degree of expectation for the occurrence of the big win state, or an image suggesting the game state after the big win state ends. By displaying the message image, it is possible to improve the willingness of the player (willingness to participate in the specific sound presentation) to listen carefully to the next specific sound presentation.

Further, based on detection of pressing of the effect button 80 outside the first to third specific sound validity determination period, a message image may be displayed to scold the player, such as "Listen carefully!". If the pressing of the effect button 80 is detected outside the validity determination period of the first to third specific sounds, the mode, average, and approximate values of the audible frequency band may be set to be low. By doing so, it is possible to improve the accuracy of the mode, average, and approximation of the audible frequency band.

<3> In the above-described Embodiment 1, the specific sound effect period is provided during the 30×n (n: integer) game-time variation display of the third symbol. and so on.

<4> In the above-described first embodiment, the specific sound effect is performed under the condition of 30×n (n: integer) game times after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. It may be performed (for example, a ready-to-win effect of a predetermined length required for a specific sound effect is performed) as a condition.

<5> In the first embodiment described above, the pitch of the one-shot notification sound was determined based on the height of the mode of the audible frequency band grasped a predetermined number of times. It may be determined based on the average value or median value of the frequency band.

<6> In the first embodiment described above, the timing to start outputting the first to third specific sounds is constant, but the timing to start outputting the first to third specific sounds is not constant. may In the following, an embodiment will be described in which the timing of starting to output the first to third specific sounds is not constant. The specific sound output control means sets an output start timing for starting output of at least one specific sound of a high frequency band specific sound, a low frequency band specific sound, or an intermediate frequency band specific sound during the previous specific sound production period. is different from the output start timing in . Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player's age group is inaccurately grasped based on the operation means being operated by chance during the specific sound effect period.

<7> In the first embodiment described above, information corresponding to the audible frequency band is only displayed on the display means based on the audible frequency band being grasped. may be processed. In the following, an embodiment will be described in which other processing is performed based on the recognition of the audible frequency band. The voice output control means comprises estimation means for estimating the age group of the player based on the audible frequency band grasped by the grasping means. When the estimated age group is legally prohibited from playing games at the game parlor, the prohibition notification means notifies that players of the age group are playing games. Therefore, if the operation means can be operated within the effective period, the player can see the information corresponding to the audible frequency band on the display means. It is possible to appropriately notify that a game is being played.

<8> In the second embodiment described above, when the variable display result becomes a predetermined specific display mode, the higher the height of the audible frequency band grasped by the grasping means, the higher the expectation of the reach effect. Although the number of times of promotion to production was increased, it may be other than that. Below, embodiments other than reach promotion production are described.

For example, the specific display effect is an advance notice effect that suggests to the player the degree of expectation of the specific display mode. The display control means changes the number of times of changing the notice effect to a notice effect with a higher degree of expectation as the height of the audible frequency band grasped by the grasping means is higher when the variable display result becomes a predetermined specific display mode. increase Therefore, when it is decided that the result of the variable display will be in a predetermined specific display mode, a large number of changes are made until the advance notice effect is so highly anticipated that the specific sound having a high frequency band can be heard. You can see the preview production that changes the number of times.

Further, for example, the specific display effect is operated by the operation means or other operation means during a period in which the first specific display effect (for example, normal reach effect) in which the degree of expectation for the specific display mode is at a predetermined level is displayed. When the start condition (for example, the condition of clearing the game) for starting the second specific display effect (super ready-to-win effect) having a higher expectation than the first specific display effect is satisfied, the first specific display effect is satisfied. A game effect for ending a display effect and executing a second specific display effect, in which the start condition is easily satisfied (the game is easily cleared) according to the height of the audible frequency band grasped by the grasping means. . Therefore, the more the specific sound having a higher frequency band can be heard, the more likely it is that the condition for starting the second specific display effect will be met.

<9> In the ready-to-reach promotion effect of the second embodiment described above, the ready-to-reach promotion effect was started based on the player hearing any of the first to third specific sounds, but the specific sound output mode And the method of determining the start time point of the ready-to-reach promotion effect may be another method. For example, if it is possible to output the third specific sound, the first specific sound, and the second specific sound in order during the specific sound production period, and listen to all the specific sounds during the entire specific sound output period (the specific sound If the answer to the output order quiz is correct), the reach promotion effect is started. If the specific sound output order quiz is not answered correctly during the period, a new specific sound output order quiz is performed, and if the new specific sound output order quiz is answered correctly, reach promotion performance is started. As a result, it is possible to determine the starting point of the ready-to-reach promotion effect based on the correctness of the height of the audible frequency band and the output order that have been grasped.

<10> In the step-up notice effect of the fourth embodiment described above, the frequency band is increased step by step such as the third specific sound (17 kHz) → second specific sound (15 kHz) → first specific sound (15 kHz). However, it is not limited to this, and the first, second, and third specific sounds are randomly output (interwoven), or the first, second, and third specific sounds are output along a certain rhythm. Alternatively, a specific sound in the same frequency band may be output multiple times. By randomly outputting the first, second and third specific sounds, it becomes difficult for the player to predict the specific sound to be output next. If the first, second, and third specific sounds are output along with a certain rhythm, the player will be less likely to predict the specific sound that will be output next, rather than simply increasing or decreasing the sound. Outputting the specific sound of the frequency band with the same pitch a plurality of times makes it easier for the player who can hear the specific sound of the frequency band with that pitch. When the frequency band of the specific sound audible to the player is grasped, the height of the frequency band of the specific sound thereafter may be made constant.

<11> In the above-described Examples 1 to 5, the pitch of the one-shot notification sound (first to third) is determined (Example 1), the type of reach promotion effect (A to C) is determined, and (implementation Example 2), determination of the type (first to third) of the pre-reading notice effect (Example 3), determination of the number of steps for the step-up notice effect (Example 4), opening number suggesting effect and time saving state suggesting effect In determining the timing of (Example 5) and investigating the age group (Example 6), three specific sounds: the first specific sound (19 kHz), the second specific sound (17 kHz), and the third specific sound (15 kHz) has been used, but it is not limited to this, and the pitch of one specific sound can be continuously lowered from 19 kHz to 15 kHz, or the pitch of the specific sound can be increased or decreased. You may change the pitch of each specific sound. This makes it possible to subdivide the age groups of decision targets and survey targets.

<12> In the above-described Examples 1 to 5, the specific sound was used for the above-described determination and investigation, but this is not the only option. It may be information, visual information, tactile information or olfactory information. Examples of auditory information include sounds with different volumes, in addition to sounds with different frequency bands as in Examples 1-5. The younger the player's age group, the easier it is for him/her to hear even low volume sounds, and the older the player's age group, the more difficult it is for the player to hear low volume sounds. Such trends can be used in the same manner as in Examples 1-5 to make the determinations and investigations described above.

<13> An example of visual information is to vary the size of an object visually recognized by the player. The younger the player's age group, the easier it is for him or her to visually recognize an object with a small level. Therefore, for example, instead of the specific sound effect, the third pattern display device 42 (the variable display device 60 in the fifth embodiment) displays a quiz effect in the form of a visual acuity test so that the player can visually recognize the effect. It is possible to grasp the size and detail (level) of an object. Instead of changing the size and fineness of the object, the speed at which the object moves may be changed. The target may be, for example, a game part (a part having a movable part such as a model or a chucker) arranged on the game board 30, other than the image. Such trends can be used in the same manner as in Examples 1-5 to make the determinations and investigations described above.

<14> An example of tactile information is to vary the magnitude of vibration felt by the player tactilely. The younger the player's age group, the easier it is for them to feel even small level vibrations, and the older the player's age group, the less likely they are for them to feel small level vibrations. Therefore, for example, by mounting a vibrator inside the game ball shooting handle 18 and vibrating the game ball shooting handle 18, the player can grasp the magnitude (level) of vibration that can be tactilely recognized. can. A vibrator may be mounted at a location other than the ball firing handle 18, such as part of the front frameset 14. In that case, in the effect, the player places his or her hand on the place where the vibrator is mounted and feels the magnitude of the vibration. The tactile information may be information other than vibration, such as the sensation of a projecting object hitting the hand or the sensation of wind hitting the player's body. Such trends can be used in the same manner as in Examples 1-5 to make the determinations and investigations described above.

<15> An example of the olfactory information is to vary the strength of the scent sensed by the player's sense of smell. The younger the player's age group, the easier it is to perceive even a weak level of scent, and the older the player's age group, the less likely it is to perceive a weak level of scent. Therefore, for example, a scent releasing device such as an aroma diffuser is mounted on the front frame set 14, and the amount (level) of the scent released from the scent releasing device is varied so that the player can olfactively recognize Possible intensity (level) of fragrance can be grasped. Specifically, the amount of scent can be varied by adjusting the temperature of the heater that heats the perfume oil. Such trends can be used in the same manner as in Examples 1-5 to make the determinations and investigations described above.

<16> In the above-described Examples 1 to 5, as the specific sound or one-shot notification sound, the second and third specific sounds having a high frequency band such as 15 kHz and 15 kHz, and an ultra-high frequency band such as 19 kHz Although the first specific sound having a frequency band of is described as an example, the first, second, and third specific sounds are specific sounds composed of a high frequency band from 1 kHz to 10 kHz. good. Also, the first, second, and third specific sounds may be specific sounds composed of a frequency band in the middle range from 100 kHz to 1 kHz. Also, the first, second, and third specific sounds may be specific sounds composed of a low frequency band such as 10 Hz to 100 Hz. Also, the first, second, and third specific sounds may be specific sounds composed of frequency bands of high, middle, and low sound ranges.

<17> In the above-described Embodiments 1 to 5, the first, second, and third specific sounds were explained as sounds having a constant frequency height, Sounds or voices such as "la la la", "kyun kyun", or "you did it" may be used instead of the sound of . In this case, just before the start of the specific sound production, an operation instruction such as ``Press the button when you hear the sound of ``Lalala'' is displayed, and the player is directed to the timing when the sound of ``Lalala'' is heard. A button 80 is pressed. It is better to change the ease of listening to "la la la" by changing the pitch of the sound.

Further, the specific sound effect is a effect to see whether or not the specific sound can be heard, but it may be a effect to hit the specific sound. For example, just before the start of the specific sound effect, the "la la la" played in a certain range of the piano is output first, and an operation instruction such as "Press the button when you hear the same sound as the current sound" is displayed. . In each specific sound production, ``la-la-la'' played in the same range, ``la-la-la'' played in a different range, and ``la-la-la-la'' with different contents are output, and whether the production button 80 was operated with the correct ``la-la-la''. Depending on whether or not, the difference in the player's sense of pitch may be grasped. In this case, a one-shot notification sound may be emitted to a player with a high accuracy rate.

Further, the specific sound effect is not limited to grasping the player's age group from the frequency band that the player can hear, but may grasp the player's taste. For example, in the specific sound production, the members of the idol group take turns calling out to the player for each specific sound production (for example, calling out "Will you support me?"), and the player responds to the call of the member he likes. The effect may be such that the player responds by pressing the effect button 80 (response "I will support you"). In this case, if the results of the specific sound effects are collected, the player can grasp which member he/she likes. As a result, with the one-shot announcement sound, the player's interest in the one-shot announcement effect can be enhanced by outputting the one-shot announcement message "You did it" in the voice of the player's favorite member. In addition, in the game machine-linked game, it is possible to further encourage the player to participate in the specific sound effect by providing a privilege according to the number of times the player responds to the member's call. In addition, in the game machine-linked game, even when the player plays with different gaming machines (or different halls), it is possible to let the gaming machine grasp the members of the player's preference that have been grasped in advance and reflect them in the production. .

<18> In the first embodiment described above, the one-shot announcement timing at which the one-shot announcement sound is output is set in advance, but the one-shot announcement timing may be changed according to the player. For example, when the upper limit of the one-shot announcement sound is determined to be the first one-shot announcement sound, and the first one-shot announcement sound is output, the first one-shot announcement sound is normally difficult to hear, and the player may Since there is a risk of missing it, the one-shot notification timing may be set a plurality of times during the ready-to-win effect period. On the other hand, although the upper limit of the one-shot announcement sound is determined to be the first one-shot announcement sound, if the second and third one-shot announcement sounds are actually output, the player will feel that the second and third one-shot announcement sounds are output. Since the third one-shot announcement sound is easy to hear, the one-shot announcement timing may be provided only once during the reach period.

<19> In the first embodiment described above, the specific sound effect is performed during the first ready-to-win effect after the 30xnth variation, but it may be performed during the 30xnth variation. In this case, it is necessary to ensure that the 30×n-th fluctuation time is longer than the specific sound presentation period. Therefore, when the specific sound effect is performed during the 30×nth variation, it is necessary to determine in advance such that the 30×nth variation pattern for performing the specific sound effect is performed for a longer period of time than the specific sound effect period. . Specifically, such a specific sound effect is 20 × n times (n = 1 to 10 ) can be realized by storing a variation pattern table in which the variation time is longer than the specific sound production time.

<20> In the above-described Examples 1 to 5, in order to grasp the player's age group, a specific sound (with a different frequency height) was output to test the player's hearing, but the player's sense ( In order to grasp hobbies, interests, and preferences other than the five senses, information that draws out the player's hobbies, interests, and preferences may be output. For example, in order to grasp the taste of the player, a plurality of groups of idol groups are made to appear alternately one by one for each specific performance, and the player is made to select the member who has the most favorable impression among the idol groups of each group. Then, in the one-shot announcement production, the selected members who gathered the most favorable members in each group are displayed. Specifically, the member who gives the most favorable impression is selected by the selection buttons 71 to 74 and determined by the production button 80 . As a result, the player's taste can be investigated appropriately. In addition, by assembling the subsequent production (one-shot announcement production, non-fluctuation normal game, fluctuation, reach, jackpot round background image, music) centering on the members who received the most favorable impression, these productions It is possible to improve the player's interest in Note that the image related to each group of idol groups described above corresponds to the "reaction promotion information" of the following invention.

Also, in order to grasp the hobbies and interests of the player, information that draws out the hobbies and interests of the player may be output. For example, in order to grasp the player's interests and hobbies, multiple quizzes of one genre selected from multiple genres such as sports, music, fashion, and games are given for each specific performance, and the genre with a high correct answer rate is selected. It is understood that the genre is close to the player's interests and hobbies. Specifically, the quiz answers are selected by the selection buttons 71 to 74 and determined by the production button 80 . As a result, the player's tastes and tastes can be investigated appropriately. Further, by arranging the subsequent performance centering on the genre of the player's interests and hobbies, the subsequent performance can be made close to the player's interests and hobbies. It should be noted that the images related to each set of quizzes described above correspond to the "reaction promotion information" of the following invention.

<21> In the above-described Examples 1 to 5, in order to grasp the player's age group, a specific sound (with a different frequency height) was output to test the player's hearing. The age group of the player may be grasped. For example, the age group of the player may be grasped by setting a quiz whose correct answer rate tends to vary according to the age group of the player. Specifically, for each age group of players such as 20's, 30's, 40's, etc., a generational intro quiz consisting of familiar hit songs for players of each age group is played for each specific sound production. , and the age group of the player can be grasped from the correct intro quiz generation. The age group of the player can also be appropriately grasped by such a method.

<22> In Examples 1 to 5 described above, the audio output unit 24b for outputting the specific sound and the one-shot announcement sound was provided separately from the audio output unit 24a for outputting normal audio, but only one audio output unit A normal sound, a specific sound, and a one-shot notification sound may be output by only the sound.

<23> In the above-described embodiment, the case where the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine has been described, but it may be applied to other types of gaming machines such as slot machines.

For example, the present invention may be implemented in various types of gaming machines (for example, first-class, third-class, etc.), or may be implemented in pachinko machines of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) It may be implemented as Further, after the big winning symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that enters a specific game state under the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Also, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that enters a specific game state when a ball enters a predetermined winning hole. Furthermore, in addition to the pachinko machine, various game machines such as an arranged ball type pachinko, a mammoth ball, and a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined may be implemented.

As a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying a symbol after variably displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols, and a handle for hitting a ball. There are things that are not provided. In this case, after inserting a predetermined amount of game balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the pattern is stopped, and a big win state advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the fixed pattern at the time of the stop is a so-called big win pattern, and the player is provided with a receiving tray at the bottom. A large number of balls are paid out to .

<24> In the embodiments 7 to 10, the game board 30 has a game part (branch rail 401) that divides the right game area 30r into the first right game area 30r1 and the second right game area 30r2. 67, a member other than the game board 30 (for example, the inner frame 12) may have a function corresponding to the branch rail 401. FIG. FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the board configuration of the game board 30 attached to the inner frame 12 according to the modification.

That is, as shown in FIG. 67, the inner frame 12 has a passage forming portion 12b that divides the right side game area 30r into a first right side game area 30r1 and a second right side game area 30r2 in a state where the game board 30 is attached. I have. For example, the passage forming portion 12b extends the wall portions 55 and 56 formed in the inner frame 12 shown in cross section in FIG. It is formed so as to be recessed in a concave shape. The passage forming portion 12b may be formed integrally with the resin base 12a that forms the inner frame, or may be configured as a separate component that is fixed to the resin base 12a. In either configuration, the passage forming portion 12b can be made stronger than the plate-shaped branch rail 401. FIG. In addition, the passage forming portion 12b is made of a permeable resin, so that game balls flowing down the first game area can be visually recognized from the front of the game board 30. As shown in FIG.

<25> In Examples 7 to 10, the rail-shaped game member such as the branch rail 401 divides the right game area 30r into the first right game area 30r1 and the second right game area 30r2, but the branch rail 401 It may be a game component other than that. Alternatively, the first right game area 30r1 and the second right game area 30r2 may be formed by not planting the nail 39 instead of the branch rail 401. FIG.

<26> In Examples 7 to 10, game parts such as nails 39 that affect the flow of game balls are not arranged in the first right side game area 30r1, but the game balls are aimed at the second right side game area 30r2. A game component that affects the flow of game balls may be arranged in the first right game area 30r1 within a range in which the jackpot digestion time is shorter than when the .

<27> In Examples 7 to 10, the ratio of the game balls flowing down the second right side game area 30r2 during the jackpot game state to enter the variable winning device 32 is determined by Although the ratio of the falling game balls entering the variable prize winning device 32 is lower than that, the profit (which cannot be obtained in the first right side game area 30r2 by the game balls flowing down the second right side game area 30r2 during the jackpot game state) If the winning ball, reserved) is obtained, the ratio of the game balls flowing down the second right side game area 30r2 during the jackpot game state to the variable winning device 32 is calculated as the first right side game area 30r1 during the jackpot game state. may be approximated to the ratio of the falling game balls entering the variable winning device 32 .

<28> In Examples 7 to 10, in one jackpot game state, the profit earned by the player when playing the game in the first right side game area 30r1 and in the case of playing the game in the second right side game area 30r2 Although the (difference ball) was approximated, the profit (difference ball) obtained by the player may be differentiated. For example, in Examples 7 and 8, there is a possibility that a game ball flowing down the second right side game area 30r2 enters the first starting hole 33a. Therefore, there is a possibility that more profit can be obtained by playing the game in the second right side game area 30r2 than in the case of playing the game in the first right side game area 30r1. As a result, the interest of the player who plays the game in the second right game area 30r2 can be improved.

<29> In Examples 7 to 10, the player selects the first right side game area 30r1 and the second right side game area 30r2 according to his/her own play. When the game area where the player is recommended to play the game is decided, it may be notified by the third symbol display device 42 as shown in FIG. Incidentally, FIGS. 68(a) to (d) are examples of notification images for designating the first right game area 30r1 or the second right game area 30r2.

For example, in the eighth embodiment, if a winning result is obtained during the normal gaming state, the third symbol display device 42 displays " Aim at the first right game area", or turn the shooting handle to the A position (the position where the ball can enter the first right game area 30r1) as shown in FIG. 68(b). Please". Also, when the winning result is obtained during the variable probability state, similarly, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 68(d), a message such as "Please turn the shooting handle to the B position (the position where the ball can be entered into the second right game area 30r2)" is displayed. Thereby, the player can accurately understand the operation of the right-handed game.

In addition, in the eighth embodiment, when shifting to the variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, at the start of the variable probability state, as shown in FIGS. may be displayed. In addition, when the jackpot gaming state is a game in the first right side game area 30r1, etc., and the game is continued in the first right side game area 30r1 even after shifting to the variable probability state, the above-mentioned second A display may be made to warn players to aim at the right game area 30r2.

<30> The positions of the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, the first starting port 33a, the second starting port 33b, and the third starting port 33 in Embodiments 7 to 10 are the positions described in the drawings. may be changed within the scope of the present invention.

<31> In Examples 7 to 10, the game balls flowing down the second right game area 30r2 are paid out based on the balls entering the general winning opening 31, the first starting opening 33b, and the second starting opening 33a. By receiving, it was configured to obtain a profit that could not be obtained in the first right side game area 30r1. 33b, the winning ball is not limited to the ball entering the second starting hole 33a. That is, the profit that cannot be obtained in the first right game area 30r1 may be the profit that the retention increases based on the ball entering the first starting hole 33b and the second starting hole 33a. In this way, when the general winning opening 31 is not arranged in the second right game area 30r2, or when the first starting opening 33b and the second starting opening 33a without winning balls based on the entered ball , the first starting port 33b and the second starting port 33a, which have the function of increasing the hold, correspond to the game value imparting means of the present invention.

<32> In the eleventh embodiment, in the jackpot game state, three patterns of the left side game area 30l, the first right side game area 30r1, and the second right side game area 30r2 can be separated. A configuration in which two patterns of the game area 30l and the first right game area 30r1 can be divided, or a configuration in which two patterns of the left game area 30l and the second right game area 30r2 can be divided may be used. In the case of two patterns of beating, the right game area 30r is preferably composed of either the first right game area 30r1 or the second right game area 30r2.

This specification also discloses an invention relating to the following game machine.
In the following, after each item specifying the invention, the configuration of an example thereof is described.

<First task>
Conventionally, typical examples of gaming machines include pachinko machines and slot machines.

Gaming machine manufacturers that design this type of gaming machine sometimes conduct questionnaires to players and collect responses (for example, refer to Patent Document 1: JP-A-2008-242529 (pages 1 and 2). ).

However, the conventional example having such a configuration has the following problems.
In other words, with conventional gaming machines, even if a player is given a questionnaire, there are cases where the player does not respond to the questionnaire. However, there is a problem that it is difficult to research information (for example, the age group of the players) regarding the players who play games on the gaming machine.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The following invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably investigating information about a player playing a game on the gaming machine.

<A system: Age group survey, one-shot announcement>
(A0) A gaming machine that variably displays identification information due to the establishment of a starting condition, and transitions to a specific game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variative display becomes a predetermined specific display mode. in
information output means (sound output unit 24) for outputting auditory, visual, tactile or olfactory recognizable auditory information, visual information, tactile information or olfactory information according to the progress of the game;
Information output control means (sub-control device 262) for controlling the output of information by the information output means;
and an operation means (production button 80) for receiving the operation of the player,
The information output control means is
Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (30×n game times (n: integer)), within the specific information presentation period during the variable display of the identification information, a specific having a plurality of levels at which the first recognizable time point differs depending on the player. Specific information output control means (first and third specific sound output flags) for controlling output of auditory information, specific visual information, specific tactile information or specific olfactory information (first specific sound: 19 kHz, third specific sound: 15 kHz) When,
Setting means (specified Steps S2002 and S2006 in the sound listening determination process;
grasping means for grasping the level of the specific auditory information, the specific visual information, the specific tactile information, or the specific olfactory information that the player has been able to recognize based on the operation of the operating means during the effective period; and (first and third specific sound listening flags),
Based on the understanding of the level, specific information corresponding to the level (first and third specific sound listening images: "It seems that you can hear up to 19 kHz. Amazing! Great!", "It seems that you can hear up to 15 kHz.") a specific information display control means (first and third specific sound listening display flags) for displaying a character image) on the display means (third pattern display device 42).

According to the gaming machine described in (A0) above, the specific information output control means, based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, determines the time point that can be first recognized by the player within the specific information presentation period during the variable display of the identification information. Control output of specific auditory information, specific visual information, specific tactile information or specific olfactory information having different levels. The setting means sets an effective period during which the operation of the operating means is effective during the output of the specific auditory information, specific visual information, specific tactile information, or specific olfactory information within the specific information rendering period. The grasping means grasps the level of the specific auditory information, the specific visual information, the specific tactile information, or the specific olfactory information that the player has been able to hear based on the operation of the operating means during the validity period. Since the level of specific auditory information, specific visual information, specific tactile information, or specific olfactory information that a player can recognize differs depending on the age group of the player, the level of the specific auditory information, specific visual information, specific tactile information, or specific olfactory information that can be recognized by the game machine manufacturer is recognized by the player grasped by the grasping means. By reading the level of the specific auditory information, specific visual information, specific tactile information, or specific olfactory information that has been produced, it is possible to investigate the age group of the players who have played games on the gaming machine. Further, the specific information display control means causes the display means to display the specific information corresponding to the level based on the grasp of the level. Thus, if the operation means can be operated within the effective period, the specific information corresponding to the level of specific auditory information, specific visual information, specific tactile information, or specific olfactory information is displayed on the display means, thereby attracting the player's interest. be able to. If the game machine maker reads out the level of the specific auditory information, specific visual information, specific tactile information, or specific olfactory information that has been grasped, it is possible to grasp information about the players who play games with the game machines, such as age groups of the players. Therefore, it is possible to acquire information about the player who plays the game with the gaming machine, such as the player's age group, while the game is being played, while providing the player with the interest of being able to see the specific information. As a result, it is possible to suitably research information about players who play games on the gaming machine.

(A00) A gaming machine that variably displays identification information due to the establishment of a starting condition, and shifts to a specific game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variative display becomes a predetermined specific display mode. in
Operation means (production button 80) for receiving the operation of the player;
information output means for outputting information according to the progress of the game;
and an information output control means (sub control device 262) for controlling the output of information by the information output means,
The information output control means is
Reaction prompting information output control means for controlling output of reaction prompting information for prompting a player to perform a predetermined reaction accompanied by operation of the operation means within a specific performance period during which the identification information is displayed in a variable manner based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. When,
setting means for setting a validity period during which the operation of the operation means is valid during the output of the reaction promotion information within the specific performance period;
grasping means for grasping a player's reaction to the reaction prompting information based on the operation of the operating means during the valid period;
a specific information output control means for causing the information output means to output specific information corresponding to the reaction based on the recognition of the reaction.

Thus, if the operating means can be operated within the effective period, the information output means outputs the specific information corresponding to the player's reaction to the reaction-promoting information. can attract people's attention. If the gaming machine maker reads out the player's reaction thus grasped, it is possible to grasp information about the player playing the game (not limited to the age group, but information such as interests, hobbies, tastes, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to acquire information such as the player's interests, hobbies, preferences, etc. during the progress of the game while providing the player with the interest of being able to see the specific information. As a result, it is possible to suitably research information about players who play games on the gaming machine.

(A1) A gaming machine that variably displays identification information due to the establishment of a starting condition, and transitions to a specific game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variative display becomes a predetermined specific display mode. in
audio output means (audio output unit 24) for outputting audio according to the progress of the game;
an audio output control means (sub-controller 262) for controlling audio output by the audio output means;
and an operation means (production button 80) for receiving the operation of the player,
The audio output control means is
Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (30×n game times (n: integer)), a frequency band with a predetermined height that can be heard only by some players within a specific sound effect period during which the identification information is displayed in a variable manner. and a low frequency band specific sound (third specific sound: 15 kHz) having a frequency band lower than that (first specific sound: 19 kHz) to the sound output means specific sound output control means (first and third specific sound output flags) for controlling;
Within the specific sound production period, the operation of the operating means is enabled during the output of the high frequency band specific sound, and during the output of the low frequency band specific sound. setting means (steps S2002 and S2006 in the specific sound listening determination process) for setting an effective period for
grasping means (first and third specific sound listening flags) for grasping an audible frequency band that the player has been able to hear based on the operation of the operating means during the valid period;
Based on the grasping of the audible frequency band, specific information (first and third specific sound listening images) corresponding to the audible frequency band: “I heard up to 19 kHz. and a specific information display control means (first and third specific sound listening display flags) for displaying a character image "I want to see you.") on the display means (third pattern display device 42).

According to the gaming machine described in (A1) above, the specific sound output control means allows only a portion of the players to hear the specific sound during the specific sound effect period during which the identification information is being variably displayed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. control for outputting a high frequency band specific sound having a frequency band with a predetermined height and a low frequency band specific sound having a frequency band with a lower pitch to the sound output means. The setting means validates the operation of the operating means during the output of the high frequency band specific sound, and during the output of the low frequency band specific sound, within the specific sound presentation period. Set the validity period to be used. The comprehending means comprehends the audible frequency band that the player has been able to hear based on the operation of the operating means during the effective period. Since the audible frequency band is higher as the age of the player is lower and lower as the age of the player is higher, the gaming machine maker reads out the audible frequency band grasped by the grasping means, thereby allowing the game machine to play. The age group of the players who went can be investigated. Further, the specific information display control means causes the display means to display the specific information corresponding to the audible frequency band based on the identification of the audible frequency band. As a result, if the operating means can be operated within the valid period, the specific information corresponding to the audible frequency band is displayed on the display means, thereby attracting the player's interest. If the game machine maker reads out the grasped audible frequency band, it is possible to grasp information about the players who play games with the game machines, such as age groups of the players. Therefore, while providing the player with the interest of being able to see the specific information corresponding to the audible frequency band on the display means, information regarding the player playing the game, such as the player's age group, can be displayed during the progress of the game. can be obtained. As a result, it is possible to suitably research information about players who play games on the gaming machine.

The high frequency band specific sound and the low frequency band specific sound are included in the auditory recognizable auditory information described in (A0), and have a plurality of levels at different times when the player can hear it for the first time. specific auditory information possessed by The specific visual information, specific tactile information, and specific olfactory information described in (A0) can also be classified like the high frequency band specific sound and the low frequency band specific sound in the specific auditory information. Therefore, the invention relating to (A0) can also be applied to the invention relating to (A1a) to (A7) described later.

(A1a) A gaming machine that variably displays identification information due to the establishment of a starting condition, and shifts to a specific game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variative display becomes a predetermined specific display mode. in
audio output means (audio output unit 24) for outputting audio according to the progress of the game;
an audio output control means (sub-controller 262) for controlling audio output by the audio output means;
and an operation means (production button 80) for receiving the operation of the player,
The audio output control means is
Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, a high frequency band specific sound (first specific sound) having a frequency band of a predetermined height that can be heard only by some players is generated within the specific sound presentation period during the variable display of the identification information. : 19 kHz) and a low frequency band specific sound (third specific sound: 15 kHz) having a lower frequency band than that, specific sound output control means (first, third specific sound output flag);
Within the specific sound production period, the operation of the operating means is enabled during the output of the high frequency band specific sound, and during the output of the low frequency band specific sound. setting means (steps S2002 and S2006 in the specific sound listening determination process) for setting an effective period for
Specific information (first and third specific sound listening images: ``You are superhuman'', ``You are still normal and a specific information display control means (first and third specific sound listening display flags) for displaying a character image ".") on the display means (third pattern display device 42).

According to the invention described in (A1a) above, there is provided a grasping means for grasping an audible frequency band that the player has been able to hear based on the operation of the operating means during the effective period of (A1). Even if the operation means is operated during the validity period, the specific information corresponding to the operation mode is displayed on the display means. By storing the specific information in the means, the gaming machine maker can investigate the age group of the players who have played games on the gaming machine by reading out the specific information. For example, when a specific sound is output while stepwise decreasing from a high frequency band specific sound to a low frequency band specific sound, if the player can hear the high frequency band specific sound, "You are a superhuman is displayed, and if the low frequency band specific sound can be heard, the character image (specific information) saying "You are still normal, isn't it?" is output. If the specific information read by the game machine maker is information corresponding to the character image "You are a superhuman, isn't it?" It can be understood that the player is a layer player. In this way, it is possible to grasp the age group of the player who played the game on the gaming machine from the read-out specific information.

(A1b) A gaming machine that variably displays identification information due to the establishment of a starting condition, and shifts to a specific game state advantageous to the player when the variably displayed result becomes a predetermined specific display mode. in
audio output means (audio output unit 24) for outputting audio according to the progress of the game;
an audio output control means (sub-controller 262) for controlling audio output by the audio output means;
and an operation means (production button 80) for receiving the operation of the player,
The audio output control means is
Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, a high frequency band specific sound (first specific sound) having a frequency band of a predetermined height that can be heard only by some players is generated within the specific sound presentation period during the variable display of the identification information. : 19 kHz) and a low frequency band specific sound (third specific sound: 17 kHz) having a frequency band lower than that, to the sound output means (first, third specific sound output flag);
Within the specific sound production period, the operation of the operating means is enabled during the output of the high frequency band specific sound, and during the output of the low frequency band specific sound. setting means (steps S2002 and S2006 in the specific sound listening determination process) for setting an effective period for
grasping means (first and third specific sound listening flags) for grasping an audible frequency band that the player has been able to hear based on the operation of the operating means during the effective period. Amusement machine.

According to the gaming machine described in (A1b) above, specific information display control for displaying, on the display means, specific information corresponding to the operation mode, based on the fact that the operation means is operated during the validity period as in (A1). Even if no means is provided, only grasping means for grasping the audible frequency band that the player has been able to hear based on the operation of the operating means during the effective period may be provided. In such a game machine, it is possible to grasp information (audible frequency band) peculiar to the player during the specific sound production period without making the player feel uncomfortable. By reading out the audible frequency band, it is possible to suitably investigate the age group of the player who has played the game on the gaming machine.

(A2) In the gaming machine described in (A1) to (A1b) above,
The specific sound output control means outputs an intermediate frequency band specific sound (second specific sound: 17 kHz) having a frequency band between the high frequency band specific sound and the low frequency band specific sound,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the setting means sets a validity period during which the operation of the operation means is valid while the intermediate frequency band specific sound is being output.

According to the gaming machine described in (A2) above, the specific sound output control means outputs the intermediate frequency band specific sound having a frequency band between the high frequency band specific sound and the low frequency band specific sound. . The setting means sets a validity period during which the operation of the operation means is valid while the intermediate frequency band specific sound is being output. Therefore, it is possible to acquire information for grasping the player's age group in more detail during the progress of the game.

(A3) In the gaming machine according to (A1), (A1a) or (A2),
The specific sound output control means performs a downward tendency output that decreases continuously or stepwise from the high frequency band specific sound to the low frequency band specific sound, or Performs an increasing trend output that rises continuously or stepwise toward the frequency band specific sound,
The specific information display control means provides different stepwise specific information (first, second, and third specific sound listening images: "I think I heard up to 19 kHz. Great! Great!" !”, “I think I could hear up to 17 kHz. Wow!”, “I think I could hear up to 15 kHz.” , ``You are still normal, aren't you?'').

According to the gaming machine described in (A3) above, the specific sound output control means performs a downward tendency output that decreases continuously or stepwise from the high frequency band specific sound to the low frequency band specific sound, or , an increasing trend output that increases continuously or stepwise from the low frequency band specific sound toward the high frequency band specific sound. The specific information display control means displays stepwise different specific information according to the decreasing trend output or the increasing trend output. Therefore, while giving the player the interest of being able to view the information corresponding to the audible frequency band that varies step by step according to the decreasing trend output or the increasing trend output on the display means, the age of the player can be improved during the progress of the game. Information for understanding the layer can be obtained.

(A4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A3),
The specific sound output control means provides a period in which at least neither the high frequency band specific sound nor the low frequency band specific sound is output within the specific sound production period,
The gaming machine, wherein the setting means sets an invalid period during which the operation of the operation means is invalid according to a period during which the high frequency band specific sound and the low frequency band specific sound are not output.

According to the gaming machine described in (A4), the specific sound output control means provides a period during which at least neither the high frequency band specific sound nor the low frequency band specific sound is output within the specific sound presentation period. The setting means sets an invalid period during which the operation of the operation means is invalid according to a period during which the high frequency band specific sound and the low frequency band specific sound are not output. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player's age group is inaccurately grasped based on the operation means being operated by chance during the specific sound presentation period.

(A5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A4),
The specific sound output control means sets an output start timing for starting output of at least one of the high frequency band specific sound and the low frequency band specific sound to be different from the output start timing in the previous specific sound production period. A gaming machine characterized by allowing

According to the gaming machine described in (A5) above, the specific sound output control means sets the output start timing for starting output of at least one of the high frequency band specific sound and the low frequency band specific sound to the previous It is made different from the output start timing in the specific sound presentation period. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player's age group is inaccurately grasped based on the operation means being operated by chance during the specific sound effect period.

(A6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A1), (A1b) to (A5),
outputting a specific notification sound (first to third one-shot notification sounds) having a height corresponding to the height of the audible frequency band grasped by the grasping means when the result of the variable display is the specific display mode; and a specific sound notification means (first to third one-shot notification sound flags).

According to the gaming machine described in (A6) above, when the result of the variable display is the specific display mode, the specific sound notifying means has a height corresponding to the height of the audible frequency band grasped by the grasping means. Outputs a specific notification sound. With this, it is possible to inform that the variable display result will be in the specific display mode with the specific notification sound having different height according to the information peculiar to the player grasped by the grasping means. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably grasping information unique to a player playing a game on the gaming machine and suitably reflecting the information in the game.

(A7) In the gaming machine described in (A6) above,
When the audible frequency band is grasped a predetermined number of times, the voice output control means performs the specific notification based on the height of the average value, the median value, or the mode of the audible frequency band grasped the predetermined number of times. Equipped with a specific notification sound determination means (one-shot notification sound determination table) that determines the pitch of the sound,
The gaming machine, wherein the specific sound notification means outputs the specific notification sound having a height determined by the specific notification sound determination means.

According to the gaming machine described in (A7) above, the specific sound output control means includes the specific notification sound determination means, and the specific notification sound determination means, when the audible frequency band is grasped a predetermined number of times, The pitch of the specific notification sound is determined based on the height of the average value, median value, or mode of the audible frequency band grasped multiple times. The specific sound notification means outputs the specific notification sound having the height determined by the specific notification sound determination means. Therefore, the specific notification sound having different heights according to the accurately grasped information peculiar to the player is output rather than outputting the notification sound having the height corresponding to the height of the audible frequency band grasped at one time. , it is possible to notify that the variable display result will be in the specific display mode.

(A8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A7),
an estimating means for estimating the age group of the player based on the audible frequency band grasped by the grasping means;
a prohibition notification means for notifying that a player of said age group is playing a game when the estimated age group is legally prohibited from playing games at the game parlor. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine described in (A8) above, the estimation means estimates the age group of the player based on the audible frequency band grasped by the grasping means. When the estimated age group is legally prohibited from playing games at the game parlor, the prohibition notification means notifies that players of the age group are playing games. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately notify that a player in an age group whose playing is legally prohibited is playing a game.

<Second task>
Conventionally, typical examples of gaming machines include pachinko machines and slot machines. In this type of game machine, while a predetermined display effect is being displayed, a suggestive image is displayed to suggest that the detection of the operation of the operation means such as an operation button is effective, and the suggestive image is displayed. Among them, based on detecting that the operation of the operation means is valid, there is a new display effect (for example, see Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-81588, pages 1 and 2). .

However, the conventional example having such a configuration has the following problems.
That is, in the conventional gaming machine, the suggestion image suggesting that the detection of the operation of the operating means is effective is displayed in a uniform manner regardless of the difference in the players who play the game in the gaming machine. For the player who operates the operation means in response to the suggestive image, it is difficult to make a difference in the form of the new display effect thereafter. Therefore, there is a problem that the interest of the display effect that is started based on the detection of the operation of the operation means cannot be further improved.

The following invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and provides a game machine capable of improving the interest of the display effect that is started based on the detection of the operation of the operating means. for the purpose.

<B system: Promotion production (reach, notice, etc.)>
(B0) A gaming machine that variably displays identification information due to the establishment of a starting condition, and shifts to a specific game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variative display becomes a predetermined specific display mode. in
information output means (sound output unit 24) for outputting auditory, visual, tactile or olfactory recognizable auditory information, visual information, tactile information or olfactory information according to the progress of the game;
Information output control means (sub-control device 262) for controlling the output of information by the information output means;
and an operation means (production button 80) for receiving the operation of the player,
The information output control means is
Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (that the variation pattern command includes a ready-to-win promotion effect), within the specific information effect period during the variable display of the identification information, a specific item having a plurality of levels at which the player can first recognize it at different times. Specific information output control means (first to 3 specific sound output flag);
Setting means (specified Steps S2002, 2004, and 2006) in the sound listening determination process;
Grasping means (first ~ third specific sound listening flag),
Based on the grasp of the level, the production mode (types A to C) of the specific display effect (reach promotion effect) to be executed during the variable display of the identification information is determined, and in the determined effect mode, and a specific display effect control means (first to third ready-to-reach promotion effect flags) for controlling to display the specific display effect on the display means.

According to the gaming machine described in (B0) above, the information output means includes auditory, visual, tactile, or olfactory auditory, visual, tactile, or olfactory information recognizable according to the progress of the game. to output The specific information output control means provides specific auditory information and specific visual information having a plurality of levels at different points in time that can be first recognized by the player within the specific information presentation period during the variable display of the identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. , controls the output of specific tactile information or specific olfactory information. The setting means sets a validity period during which the operation of the operation means is valid while the specific auditory information, the specific visual information, the specific tactile information, or the specific olfactory information is being output within the specific information rendering period. The grasping means grasps the level of the specific auditory information, the specific visual information, the specific tactile information, or the specific olfactory information that the player has been able to recognize based on the operation of the operating means during the validity period. The level of the specific auditory information, specific visual information, specific tactile information, or specific olfactory information that the player can perceive differs depending on the player's age group, and thus is information specific to the player playing the game on the gaming machine. . By using the grasping means, it is possible to suitably grasp such information unique to the player. Further, the specific display effect control means determines the effect mode (types A to C) of the specific display effect (ready promotion effect) to be executed during the variable display of the identification information based on the grasp of the level, Control is performed to display a specific display effect on the display means in the determined effect mode. That is, based on the level of the specific auditory information, the specific visual information, the specific tactile information, or the specific olfactory information being grasped, the presentation mode of the specific display presentation differs. Therefore, the player attempts to better recognize the specific auditory information, the specific visual information, the specific tactile information, or the specific olfactory information, and thus enjoys the interest of the display performance that is started based on the detection of the operation of the operation means. can be improved.

(B1) A gaming machine that variably displays identification information due to the establishment of a starting condition, and shifts to a specific game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variative display becomes a predetermined specific display mode. in
audio output means (sound output unit 24) for outputting audio according to the progress of the game;
an audio output control means (sub-controller 262) for controlling audio output to the audio output means;
and an operation means (production button 80) for receiving the operation of the player,
The audio output control means is
Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (that the variation pattern command includes a ready-to-win promotion effect), within the specific sound effect period during the variable display of the identification information, a frequency band with a predetermined height that can be heard only by some players. A high frequency band specific sound (first specific sound: 19 kHz) and a low frequency band specific sound (second specific sound: 17 kHz, third specific sound: 15 kHz) having a lower frequency band than that Specific sound output control means (first to third specific sound output flags) for controlling output by the audio output means;
Within the specific sound production period, the operation of the operating means is enabled during the output of the high frequency band specific sound, and during the output of the low frequency band specific sound. setting means (steps S2002, 2004, and 2006 in the specific sound listening determination process) for setting an effective period for
grasping means (first to third specific sound listening flags) for grasping the audible frequency band that the player could hear based on the operation of the operating means during the valid period;
Based on the identification of the audible frequency band, a production mode (types A to C) of a specific display production (ready-to-reach promotion production) to be executed during the variable display of the identification information is determined, and the production mode thus determined is determined. and a specific display effect control means (first to third reach promotion effect flags) for controlling to display the specific display effect on the display means.

According to the invention described in (B1) above, the specific sound output control means allows only a part of the players to hear the sound during the specific sound presentation period during the variable display of the identification information based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. Control is performed so that the sound output means outputs a high frequency band specific sound having a frequency band with a predetermined height and a low frequency band specific sound having a frequency band with a lower pitch. The setting means validates the operation of the operating means during the output of the high frequency band specific sound, and during the output of the low frequency band specific sound, within the specific sound presentation period. Set the validity period to be used. The grasping means grasps the audible frequency band that the player has been able to hear based on the operation of the operating means during the effective period. Since the audible frequency band is higher as the age of the player is lower and lower as the age of the player is higher, it is information unique to the player playing the game on the gaming machine. By using the grasping means, it is possible to suitably grasp such information unique to the player. Further, the specific display effect control means determines the effect mode of the specific display effect to be executed during the variable display of the identification information based on the grasp of the audible frequency band, and the specific display effect is performed in the determined effect mode. Control is performed so that the performance is displayed on the display means. That is, based on the recognition of the audible frequency band, the presentation mode of the specific display presentation is different. Therefore, since the player tries to recognize the audible frequency band as well as possible according to his/her age group, the interest of the display effect that is started based on the detection of the operation of the operating means is improved. can be made

The high frequency band specific sound and the low frequency band specific sound are included in the aurally recognizable auditory information described in (B0), and have a plurality of levels at different times when the player can hear them for the first time. specific auditory information possessed by The specific visual information, specific tactile information and specific olfactory information described in (B0) can also be classified like the high frequency band specific sound and the low frequency band specific sound in the specific auditory information. Therefore, the invention relating to (B0) can also be applied to the invention relating to (B2) to (B4) described later.

(B2) In the gaming machine described in (B1) above,
The specific sound output control means outputs from the high frequency band specific sound to the low frequency band specific sound while decreasing continuously or stepwise,
The specific display effect control means determines the start point of the specific display effect according to the height of the audible frequency band grasped by the grasping means, and the predetermined end point from the decided start point to the predetermined end point A game machine characterized by displaying a specific display effect on display means.

According to the invention described in (B2) above, the specific sound output control means outputs the specific sound from the high frequency band specific sound to the low frequency band specific sound while decreasing the sound continuously or stepwise. The specific display effect control means determines the start time point of the specific display effect according to the height of the audible frequency band grasped by the grasping means, and the specific display effect is performed from the determined start time point to the predetermined end time point. Display on display means. That is, the time from the start to the end of the specific display effect differs depending on the height of the audible frequency band grasped by the grasping means. Therefore, since the player can see the specific display effect long enough to hear the specific sound having a high frequency band, the player can enjoy the display effect started based on the detection of the operation of the operating means. can improve sexuality.

(B3) In the gaming machine according to (B1) or (B2) above,
The specific display effect is a effect that promotes a ready-to-win effect suggesting to the player the degree of expectation of the specific display mode to a ready-to-win effect with a higher expectation than the ready-to-win effect, and is grasped by the grasping means. The gaming machine is characterized by a ready-to-win promotion performance in which the higher the height of the audible frequency band, the more times the ready-to-win performance is promoted to the ready-to-reach performance with a high expectation.

According to the gaming machine described in (B3) above, the specific display effect is an effect that promotes a ready-to-win effect that suggests to the player the degree of expectation of the specific display mode to a ready-to-win effect that has a higher expectation than the ready-to-win effect. In this reach promotion effect, the higher the height of the audible frequency band grasped by the grasping means, the more times the ready reach effect is promoted to a reach effect with a high degree of expectation. Therefore, the more the player can hear the specific sound having a higher frequency band, the more the player can see the ready-to-win effect that is promoted many times until the expected ready-to-win effect is high, so that the operation of the operation means is detected. It is possible to improve the interest of the display effect that is started based on the fact that the display is performed.

(B4) In the gaming machine according to (B1) or (B2) above,
The specific display effect is a effect of changing a notice effect that suggests to the player the degree of expectation of the specific display mode to a notice effect that has a high degree of expectation, and is audible grasped by the grasping means. The game machine is characterized in that the higher the frequency band is, the more the number of times the notice effect is changed to the notice effect with a higher degree of expectation is increased.

According to the gaming machine described in (B4) above, the specific display effect is an effect of changing the notice effect that suggests to the player the degree of expectation of the specific display mode to the notice effect that has a high degree of expectation. The higher the height of the audible frequency band grasped by the grasping means, the greater the number of times the notice effect is changed to the higher expected notice effect. Therefore, the more the player can hear the specific sound having a higher frequency band, the more the player can see the notice effect that changes many times until the predictive effect with a high degree of expectation is reached. It is possible to improve the interest of the display effect that is started based on the fact that the display is performed.

<C system: advance notice>
(C0) A gaming machine that variably displays identification information due to the establishment of a starting condition, and shifts to a specific game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variative display becomes a predetermined specific display mode. in
information output means (sound output unit 24) for outputting auditory, visual, tactile or olfactory recognizable auditory information, visual information, tactile information or olfactory information according to the progress of the game;
Information output control means (sub-control device 262) for controlling the output of information by the information output means;
and an operation means (production button 80) for receiving the operation of the player,
The information output control means is
When the determination result of the variable display of the unexecuted portion is a winning judgment that becomes the specific display mode, and a plurality of variable displays of the unexecuted portion are displayed before the variable display of the unexecuted portion that is the winning judgment. is suspended, a specific information having a plurality of levels at different points of time that can be first recognized by the player within a specific information presentation period provided in a plurality of variable display periods performed after cancellation of the variable non-execution condition Specific information output control means (first to third specific sound output flag);
Setting means (specified Steps S2002, 2004, and 2006) in the sound listening determination process;
Grasping means (first ~ third specific sound listening flag),
Based on the fact that the level is grasped, the production mode of the pre-reading notice (display with the stop pattern as the chance number "341") based on the winning determination is determined, and the pre-reading is performed in the determined production mode. a pre-reading notice control means (first to third pre-reading notice flags) for controlling to display the notice on the display means.

According to the invention described in (C0) above, the information output means outputs auditory, visual, tactile, or olfactory auditory, visual, tactile, or olfactory information recognizable according to the progress of the game. Output. The specific information output control means, when the determination result of the variable display of the unexecuted portion is a winning determination that becomes a specific display mode, and before the variable display of the unexecuted portion that is the winning determination, a plurality of unexecuted variable display When the variable display for the execution is suspended, within the specific information presentation period provided in the multiple variable display periods that are performed after the cancellation of the variable non-execution condition, a plurality of times that can be first recognized by the player are different. Control output of specific auditory information, specific visual information, specific tactile information or specific olfactory information with levels. The setting means sets a validity period during which the operation of the operation means is valid while the specific auditory information, the specific visual information, the specific tactile information, or the specific olfactory information is being output within the specific information rendering period. The grasping means grasps the level of the specific auditory information, the specific visual information, the specific tactile information, or the specific olfactory information that the player has been able to recognize based on the operation of the operating means during the validity period. The level of the specific auditory information, specific visual information, specific tactile information, or specific olfactory information that the player can perceive differs depending on the player's age group, and thus is information specific to the player playing the game on the gaming machine. . By using the grasping means, it is possible to suitably grasp such information unique to the player. Further, the pre-reading notice control means determines the presentation mode of the pre-reading notice based on the fact that the winning decision is made based on the grasp of the level, and displays the pre-reading notice on the display means in the determined presentation mode. to control. That is, based on the level of the specific auditory information, the specific visual information, the specific tactile information, or the specific olfactory information, the effect mode of the pre-reading preview effect differs. Therefore, the player attempts to better recognize the specific auditory information, the specific visual information, the specific tactile information, or the specific olfactory information, and thus enjoys the interest of the display performance that is started based on the detection of the operation of the operation means. can be improved.

(C1) A gaming machine that variably displays identification information due to the establishment of a starting condition, and transitions to a specific game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variative display becomes a predetermined specific display mode. in
holding means (holding ball storage area) for holding the variable display as an unexecuted part when a variable non-execution condition for not executing the variable display of the identification information is satisfied;
unexecuted portion determination means (prefetch winning flag) for determining whether or not the result of the unexecuted variable display becomes the specific display mode;
audio output means (sound output unit 24) for outputting audio according to the progress of the game;
an audio output control means (sub-controller 262) for controlling audio output to the audio output means;
and an operation means (production button 80) for receiving the operation of the player,
The audio output control means is
When the determination result of the variable display of the unexecuted portion is a winning judgment that becomes the specific display mode, and a plurality of variable displays of the unexecuted portion are displayed before the variable display of the unexecuted portion that is the winning judgment. is suspended, a frequency band with a predetermined height that can be heard only by some players within a specific sound presentation period provided in a plurality of variable display periods performed after the cancellation of the variable non-execution condition. and a low frequency band specific sound (third specific sound: 15 kHz) having a frequency band lower than that (first specific sound: 19 kHz). Specific sound output control means (first to third specific sound output flags) for performing control;
Within the specific sound production period, the operation of the operating means is enabled during the output of the high frequency band specific sound, and during the output of the low frequency band specific sound. setting means (steps S2002, 2004, and 2006 in the specific sound listening determination process) for setting an effective period for
grasping means (first to third specific sound listening flags) for grasping the audible frequency band that the player could hear based on the operation of the operating means during the valid period;
Based on the fact that the audible frequency band has been grasped by the grasping means, a performance mode of the pre-reading notice (display with the stop symbol as a chance number "341") based on the winning determination is determined, and the determined effect is determined. a pre-reading notice control means (first to third pre-reading notice flags) for controlling to display the pre-reading notice on the display means in an effect mode.

According to the invention described in the above (C1), the specific sound output control means, when the determination result of the variation display of the unexecuted part is a winning determination that becomes a specific display mode, and the winning determination When a plurality of unexecuted variable displays are suspended before the executed variable display, within a specific sound effect period provided during a plurality of variable display periods after the cancellation of the variable unexecuted condition, The audio output means outputs a high frequency band specific sound having a frequency band of a predetermined height that only some players can hear, and a low frequency band specific sound having a frequency band of a lower height than that. control. The setting means validates the operation of the operating means during the output of the high frequency band specific sound, and during the output of the low frequency band specific sound, within the specific sound presentation period. Set the validity period to be used. The grasping means grasps the audible frequency band that the player has been able to hear based on the operation of the operating means during the effective period. Since the audible frequency band is higher as the age of the player is lower and lower as the age of the player is higher, it is information unique to the player playing the game on the gaming machine. By using the grasping means, it is possible to suitably grasp such information unique to the player. Further, the pre-reading notice control means determines the performance mode of the pre-reading notice based on the determination of winning based on the fact that the audible frequency band is grasped by the grasping means, and displays the pre-reading notice in the decided presentation mode. Control to display on the means. That is, based on the grasp of the audible frequency band, the effect mode of the pre-reading preview effect is different. Therefore, since the player tries to recognize the audible frequency band as well as possible according to his/her age group, the interest of the display effect that is started based on the detection of the operation of the operating means is improved. can be made

Note that the high frequency band specific sound and the low frequency band specific sound are included in the auditory recognizable auditory information described in (C0), and have a plurality of levels at different times when the player can hear them for the first time. specific auditory information possessed by The specific visual information, specific tactile information, and specific olfactory information described in (C0) can also be classified like the high frequency band specific sound and the low frequency band specific sound in the specific auditory information. Therefore, the invention relating to (C0) can also be applied to the invention relating to (A1a) to (A7) described later.

(C2) In the gaming machine described in (C1) above,
The specific sound output control means outputs from the high frequency band specific sound to the low frequency band specific sound while decreasing continuously or stepwise,
The pre-reading notice control means selects from the fluctuation display performed after the fluctuation non-execution condition is cancelled, which is determined according to the height of the audible frequency band grasped by the grasping means, the fluctuation display of the non-execution portion determined as the winning decision. A gaming machine characterized in that the pre-reading notice is executed until the change display performed after the change non-execution condition is canceled.

According to the invention described in (C2) above, the specific sound output control means outputs the specific sound from the high frequency band specific sound to the low frequency band specific sound while decreasing the sound continuously or stepwise. The pre-reading notice control means determines the fluctuation non-execution condition for the non-execution fluctuation display determined as winning from the fluctuation display performed after the cancellation of the fluctuation non-execution condition determined according to the height of the audible frequency band grasped by the grasping means. A pre-reading notice is executed until the variable display performed after cancellation. Therefore, the player can see the advance notice over a large number of variable displays for a long period of time to the extent that the player can hear the specific sound having a high frequency band. It is possible to improve the interest of the started display effect.

<D system: step up>
(D0) A gaming machine that variably displays identification information due to the establishment of a starting condition, and transitions to a specific game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variative display becomes a predetermined specific display mode. in
information output means (sound output unit 24) for outputting auditory, visual, tactile or olfactory recognizable auditory information, visual information, tactile information or olfactory information according to the progress of the game;
Information output control means (sub-control device 262) for controlling the output of information by the information output means;
and an operation means (production button 80) for receiving the operation of the player,
The information output control means is
Specific auditory information, specific visual information, specific tactile information, or specific audible information, specific visual information, specific tactile information, or specific information having a plurality of levels at which the player can first perceive different points within the specific information rendering period during the variable display of the identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. Specific information output control means (first to third specific sound output flags) for controlling output of olfactory information (first specific sound: 19 kHz, second specific sound: 17 kHz, third specific sound: 15 kHz);
Setting means (specified Steps S2002, 2004, and 2006) in the sound listening determination process;
Grasping means (first ~ third specific sound listening flag),
Based on the determination of the level, a step-up effect is determined in which the specific step information (first to third step images SU1 to SU3) is displayed a plurality of times on the display means, and in the determined mode. and step-up effect control means (first to third step image display flags) for controlling to display the step-up effect on display means.

According to the gaming machine described in (D0) above, the specific information output control means, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, determines the time point that can be first recognized by the player within the specific information presentation period during the variable display of the identification information. Control output of specific auditory information, specific visual information, specific tactile information or specific olfactory information having different levels. The setting means sets an effective period during which the operation of the operating means is effective during the output of the specific auditory information, specific visual information, specific tactile information, or specific olfactory information within the specific information rendering period. The grasping means grasps the level of the specific auditory information, the specific visual information, the specific tactile information, or the specific olfactory information that the player has been able to recognize based on the operation of the operating means during the validity period. The level of the specific auditory information, specific visual information, specific tactile information, or specific olfactory information that the player can perceive differs depending on the age group of the player, and thus is information unique to the player playing the game on the gaming machine. . By using the grasping means, it is possible to suitably grasp such information unique to the player. The step-up effect control means determines a step-up effect effect mode in which the specific step information is displayed a plurality of times on the display means based on the grasp of the level, and displays the step-up effect in the determined mode. Control to display on the means. That is, the step-up effect differs depending on the level of specific auditory information, specific visual information, specific tactile information, or specific olfactory information that the player can recognize. Therefore, since the player attempts to better recognize the specific auditory information, specific visual information, specific tactile information, or specific olfactory information, the interest of the display presentation started based on the detection of the operation of the operation means is enhanced. can be improved.

(D1) A gaming machine that variably displays identification information due to the establishment of a starting condition, and transitions to a specific game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variative display becomes a predetermined specific display mode. in
audio output means (sound output unit 24) for outputting audio according to the progress of the game;
an audio output control means (sub-controller 262) for controlling audio output to the audio output means;
and an operation means (production button 80) for receiving the operation of the player,
The audio output control means is
Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, a high frequency band specific sound (first specific sound) having a frequency band of a predetermined height that can be heard only by some players is generated within the specific sound presentation period during the variable display of the identification information. : 19 kHz) and a low-frequency band specific sound (third specific sound: 15 kHz) having a frequency band lower than that, specific sound output control means (first to third specific sound output flag);
Within the specific sound production period, the operation of the operating means is enabled during the output of the high frequency band specific sound, and during the output of the low frequency band specific sound. setting means (steps S2002, 2004, and 2006 in the specific sound listening determination process) for setting an effective period for
grasping means (first to third specific sound listening flags) for grasping the audible frequency band that the player could hear based on the operation of the operating means during the valid period;
Based on the determination of the audible frequency band, a step-up effect is determined by displaying specific step information (first to third step images SU1 to SU3) a plurality of times on the display means. and step-up effect control means (first to third step image display flags) for controlling to display the step-up effect on the display means.

According to the gaming machine described in (D1) above, the specific sound output control means allows only some players to hear the specific sound within the specific sound effect period during which the identification information is being variably displayed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. The sound output means controls to output a high frequency band specific sound having a frequency band of a predetermined height and a low frequency band specific sound having a frequency band of a lower pitch. The setting means validates the operation of the operating means during the output of the high frequency band specific sound, and during the output of the low frequency band specific sound, within the specific sound presentation period. Set the validity period to be used. The grasping means grasps the audible frequency band that the player has been able to hear based on the operation of the operating means during the effective period. Since the audible frequency band is higher as the age of the player is lower and lower as the age of the player is higher, it is information peculiar to the player who plays the game with the gaming machine. By using the grasping means, it is possible to suitably grasp such information unique to the player. Further, based on the grasp of the audible frequency band, the step-up effect is determined by displaying the specific step information a plurality of times on the display means, and the step-up effect is displayed on the display means in the determined mode. control to That is, based on the audible frequency band being grasped, the effect mode of the step-up effect is different. Therefore, since the player tries to recognize the audible frequency band as well as possible according to his/her age group, the interest of the display performance that is started based on the detection of the operation of the operating means is improved. can be made

The high frequency band specific sound and the low frequency band specific sound are included in the auditory recognizable auditory information described in (D0). specific auditory information possessed by The specific visual information, specific tactile information, and specific olfactory information described in (D0) can also be classified like the high frequency band specific sound and the low frequency band specific sound in the specific auditory information. Therefore, the invention relating to (D0) can also be applied to the invention relating to (D2), which will be described later.

(D2) In the gaming machine described in (D1) above,
The specific sound output control means outputs from the low frequency band specific sound to the high frequency band specific sound while increasing the frequency band continuously or stepwise each time the audible frequency band is determined,
A gaming machine, wherein the step-up effect control means steps up the specific step information a number of times determined according to the height of the audible frequency band grasped by the grasping means.

According to the gaming machine described in (D2) above, the specific sound output control means continuously or stepwise increases the frequency from the low frequency band specific sound to the high frequency band specific sound each time the audible frequency band is grasped. Output while raising the band. The step-up effect control means steps up the specific step information a number of times determined according to the height of the audible frequency band grasped by the grasping means. Therefore, the player can see the specific step information stepping up many times for a long time so that the player can hear the specific sound having a high frequency band.

<Third task>
Conventionally, typical examples of gaming machines include pachinko machines and slot machines. A pachinko machine, for example, may enter a specific game state advantageous to the player due to the winning of a game ball in a prize winning opening provided on the game board.

In this type of game machine, there is one that notifies the transition to the specific game state by sound or image (for example, see Patent Document 1: JP 2014-90765, pages 1 and 2).

However, the conventional example having such a configuration has the following problems.
In other words, in the conventional gaming machine, the effect of notifying the transition to the specific game state is performed in a uniform manner regardless of the difference between the players. There is a problem that it is difficult to improve the above.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The following invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the presentation for notifying the transition to the specific game state.

<E system: Notification of specific game state>
(E0) When a predetermined transition condition (detection of a ball at the first starting port 33a or detection of a ball at the V winning port) is established, a specific game state advantageous to the player (wings 203a, 203b 1 time open, 2 times open, or time saving state after the end of the jackpot round game) in the gaming machine that shifts to
information output means (sound output unit 24) for outputting auditory, visual, tactile or olfactory recognizable auditory information, visual information, tactile information or olfactory information according to the progress of the game;
Information output control means (sub-control device 262) for controlling the output of information by the information output means;
and an operation means (production button 80) for receiving the operation of the player,
The information output control means is
Based on the establishment of the predetermined transition condition, the specific auditory information having a plurality of levels that are first recognized by the player within the specific information presentation period provided before the transition to the specific game state is established. , Specific information output control means (first to third specific sound output flag) and
Setting means (specified Steps S2002, 2004, and 2006) in the sound listening determination process;
Grasping means (first ~ third specific sound listening flag),
Based on the level being grasped, the timing to notify the transition to the specific game state is determined, and at the determined timing, specific notification control means for notifying the transition to the specific game state (once, a twice open suggesting flag or a time saving state suggesting flag).

According to the gaming machine described in (E0) above, the specific information output control means, based on the establishment of the predetermined transition condition, within the specific information presentation period provided before shifting to the specific game state, To control the output of specific auditory information, specific visual information, specific tactile information, or specific olfactory information having a plurality of levels at different points in time that can be first recognized by the player. The setting means sets an effective period during which the operation of the operating means is effective during the output of the specific auditory information, specific visual information, specific tactile information, or specific olfactory information within the specific information rendering period. The grasping means grasps the level of the specific auditory information, the specific visual information, the specific tactile information, or the specific olfactory information that the player has been able to recognize based on the operation of the operating means during the validity period. The level of the specific auditory information, specific visual information, specific tactile information, or specific olfactory information that the player can perceive differs depending on the age group of the player, and thus is information unique to the player playing the game on the gaming machine. . By using the grasping means, it is possible to suitably grasp such information unique to the player. The specific notification control means determines the timing of notifying the transition to the specific game state based on the grasp of the level, and notifies the transition to the specific game state at the determined timing. That is, the timing of notifying the transition to the specific game state differs based on the level of specific auditory information, specific visual information, specific tactile information, or specific olfactory information being grasped. Therefore, the player tries to better recognize the specific auditory information, specific visual information, specific tactile information or specific olfactory information, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the presentation for informing the transition to the specific game state.

(E1) When a predetermined transition condition (detection of a ball at the first starting port 33a or detection of a ball at the V winning port) is established, a specific game state advantageous to the player (wings 203a, 203b 1 time open, 2 times open, or time saving state after the end of the jackpot round game) in the gaming machine that shifts to
audio output means (sound output unit 24) for outputting audio according to the progress of the game;
an audio output control means (sub-controller 262) for controlling audio output to the audio output means;
and an operation means (production button 80) for receiving the operation of the player,
The audio output control means is
Based on the establishment of the predetermined transition condition, it has a frequency band of a predetermined height that can be heard only by some players within the specific information presentation period provided before shifting to the specific game state. A high frequency band specific sound (first specific sound: 19 kHz) and a low frequency band specific sound (second specific sound: 17 kHz, third specific sound: 15 kHz) having a frequency band lower than that is the sound Specific sound output control means (first to third specific sound output flags) for performing control to enable the output means to output;
Setting means for setting an effective period during which the operation of the operation means is effective during the output of the high frequency band specific sound, and during the output of the low frequency band specific sound. (Steps S2002, 2004, and 2006 in the specific sound hearing determination process);
grasping means (first to third specific sound listening flags) for grasping the audible frequency band that the player could hear based on the operation of the operating means during the valid period;
Based on the fact that the audible frequency band is grasped, a specific notification control means (1 a times, twice opening suggestion flag, or a time saving state suggestion flag).

According to the gaming machine described in (E1) above, the specific sound output control means, based on the establishment of the predetermined transition condition, within the specific information presentation period provided before shifting to the specific game state, The audio output means can output a high frequency band specific sound having a frequency band with a predetermined height that only some players can hear, and a low frequency band specific sound having a frequency band with a lower height than that. to control. The setting means sets an effective period during which the operation of the operation means is effective during the output of the high frequency band specific sound, and during the output of the low frequency band specific sound. The grasping means grasps the audible frequency band that the player has been able to hear based on the operation of the operating means during the effective period. Since the audible frequency band is higher as the age of the player is lower and lower as the age of the player is higher, it is information unique to the player playing the game on the gaming machine. By using the grasping means, it is possible to suitably grasp such information unique to the player. The specific notification control means determines the timing of notifying the transition to the specific game state based on the grasp of the audible frequency band, and notifies the transition to the specific game state at the determined timing. In other words, the timing of notifying the transition to the specific game state is different based on the fact that the audible frequency band is grasped. Therefore, the player tries to recognize the audible frequency band as better as possible according to his/her age group, so that the interest of the performance for informing the transition to the specific game state can be improved.

The high frequency band specific sound and the low frequency band specific sound are included in the auditory recognizable auditory information described in (E0). specific auditory information possessed by The specific visual information, specific tactile information, and specific olfactory information described in (E0) can also be classified like the high frequency band specific sound and the low frequency band specific sound in the specific auditory information.

(E2) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A0) to (E1),
A gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine.

According to the gaming machine described in (E2) above, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine capable of improving the interest of the game using the operating means. The basic configuration of the pachinko machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, a ball as a game medium is shot into a predetermined game area, and the ball is disposed at a predetermined position within the game area. The identification information (patterns, etc.) dynamically displayed on the display device may be determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, provided that the player wins a prize (or passes through the activation gate). In addition, when a specific game state occurs, a variable prize winning means (specific prize winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the ball to win a prize, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

(E3) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A0) to (E1),
A gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine.

According to the gaming machine described in (E3) above, it is possible to provide a slot machine capable of improving the interest of a game using the operating means. In addition, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop A gaming machine comprising specific game state generating means for generating a specific game state advantageous to a player on the condition that final identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

<Fourth task>
Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. A pachinko machine, for example, may enter a specific game state advantageous to the player due to the winning of a game ball in a starting winning hole provided on the game board.

In this type of gaming machine, there is a game in which a game ball is made to flow down to a game area during a specific game state to enter a big winning hole (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-33792) See Figure 5).

However, the conventional example having such a configuration has the following problems.
That is, in the conventional gaming machine, since the game during the specific game state tends to become monotonous, there is a problem that the player cannot fully enjoy the specific game state.

The following invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a specific game state.

<F system: configuration of the game board>
(F0) In a game machine having a game area where game balls flow down,
The play area is
Consists of at least a first area and a second area provided on the left side of the first area when viewed from the front of the gaming machine,
When the result of the lottery based on the establishment of the starting condition is a specific result, a specific entry ball provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the first area and the game ball flowing down the second area can enter. A specific game that has an opening and performs a game that closes the specific ball entrance for a predetermined number of times under the condition that either a predetermined time elapses after the opening of the specific ball entrance or a predetermined number of game balls enter. a specific ball entry means for generating a game state;
game value imparting means for imparting a predetermined game value upon entry or passage of a game ball flowing down the game area;
Flow direction changing means for changing the flow direction of some of the game balls flowing down the second area during the specific game state to a direction in which the ball can enter or pass through the game value imparting means;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine described in (F0), even when the specific game state is executed, if the player shoots the game ball aiming at the second area, the second area is caused to flow down by the flow direction changing means. By changing the flow direction of the game ball, it is possible to play the game in the specific game state for a longer time than when the game ball is shot aiming at the first area, and at the same time, it is possible to play a predetermined game which cannot be obtained in the first area. It is also possible to obtain gaming value. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the specific game state.

(F0A) In the gaming machine described in (F0) above,
The first area is a first right side area provided on the right side of a center line that bisects the width of the game area horizontally,
A gaming machine, wherein the second area is a second right area provided on the left side of the first right area.

According to the gaming machine described in (F0A), the first right area provided on the right side of the center line that bisects the width of the game area to the left and right, and the second area provided on the left side of the first right area The invention relating to (F0) can also be suitably applied to a game machine having a game board having a right side area.

(F0B) In the gaming machine described in (F0) above,
The first area is a left side area provided on the left side of a center line that bisects the horizontal width of the game area,
The gaming machine, wherein the second area is a right side area provided on the right side of the center line.

According to the gaming machine described in (F0B), it has a left side area provided on the left side of the center line that bisects the width of the game area to the left and right, and a right side area provided on the right side of the center line. The invention relating to (F0) can also be suitably applied to a game machine having a game board.

Moreover, the present invention can solve the following problems together with the following inventions. Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a typical example of a game machine. A pachinko machine, for example, may enter a specific game state advantageous to the player due to the winning of a game ball in a starting winning hole provided on the game board.
In some gaming machines of this type, a right-handed game is performed in which a game ball is made to flow down to the right side area provided on the right side of the game area during a specific game state to enter a large winning opening (for example, Patent Document 1: See FIG. 5 of JP-A-2014-33792).
However, the conventional example having such a configuration has the following problems.
That is, in the conventional gaming machine, the specific game state performed in the right-handed game tends to take a short time until the specific game state is completed, and the game in the specific game state tends to be monotonous. There is a problem that the player cannot fully enjoy the specific game state.
The following invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a specific game state in a right-handed game.

(F1) In a game machine having a game area in which game balls flow down,
The play area is
A right side area provided on the right side of the center line that bisects the width of the game area to the left and right is a first right side area provided along the right outer edge of the right side area, and a left side of the first right side area. A second right region provided,
When the result of the lottery based on the establishment of the starting condition is a specific result, a specific provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the first right side area and the game ball flowing down the second right side area can enter. It has a ball entrance, and it is one round until the specific ball entrance is closed under the condition that either a predetermined time has passed since the specific ball entrance is opened or a predetermined number of game balls are entered. A specific ball entry means that generates a specific game state in which a round game is performed a predetermined number of times,
game value imparting means for imparting a predetermined game value upon entry or passage of a game ball flowing down the game area;
Flow direction changing means for changing the flow direction of some of the game balls flowing down the second right side area during the specific game state to a direction in which the ball can enter or pass through the game value imparting means;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine described in (F1) above, the right area provided on the right side of the center line that bisects the horizontal width of the game area is composed of a first right area and a second right area. there is The first right area is provided along the right outer edge of the right area, and the second right area is provided to the left of the first right area. Therefore, a game ball shot to the right flows down the first right side area located on the outer edge side of the game area when the shooting momentum is strong, but if the shooting momentum is weaker than the first right side area It flows down the second right side area located inside. The specific ball entry means for generating the specific game state in which the round game is performed a predetermined number of times is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the first right side area and the game ball flowing down the second right side area can enter. , The game ball enters the specific ball entering means regardless of which of the first right area and the second right area the game ball is shot. The game value imparting means imparts a predetermined game value when a game ball that flows down the game area enters or passes through the game area. give to

The game balls shot aiming at the second right side area during the specific game state flow down toward the specific ball entering means, but some of the game balls flowing down the second right side area during the specific game state are played. The flowing direction of the ball is changed by the flowing direction changing means to a direction in which the ball can enter or pass through the game value imparting means. Therefore, in the specific game state, the case where the game ball is shot aiming at the second right side area is more likely to be in the direction than the specific ball entering means than the case where the game ball is shot aiming at the first right side area. As the flow direction is changed, the time to reach the specific ball entry means is lengthened, so the time to complete the predetermined number of round games can be lengthened, and the predetermined number which cannot be obtained in the first right side area can be increased. It is possible to obtain game value. Therefore, even when the specific game state with the right hand is executed, if the player shoots the game ball aiming at the second right area, it takes longer time than when the game ball is shot aiming at the first right area. , a game can be played in the specific game state, and a predetermined game value that cannot be obtained in the first right area can be obtained. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the specific game state in the right-handed game.

(F2) In the gaming machine described in (F1) above,
A game board having the game area,
The game board is
a first game component disposed in a state in which at least the right side area is left on the right side of the center line in the game area;
The right side area is divided into the first right side area provided along the right outer edge of the right side area and the second right side area provided between the first right side area and the right outer edge of the first game component. a divided second game component;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine described in (F2) above, the game board comprises a first game component arranged with at least a right side area left on the right side of the center line in the game area, and a second game component disposed on the right side of the game component, the right region includes a first right region provided along the right outer edge of the right region by the second game component, the first right region and the first game component Since it is divided into the second right side area provided between the right outer edge of the game board and the second right side area, the player can clearly see that the right side area of the game board is divided into the first right side area and the second right side area.

(F3) In the gaming machine according to (F1) or (F2) above,
The flow direction changing means is
A first flow direction change for changing the flow direction of a part of the game balls flowing down the second right side area during the specific game state to a direction in which the ball can enter or pass through the game value imparting means. means, and a second flow direction changing means for changing a direction in which a ball is unlikely to enter the specific ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine described in (F3) above, the flowing direction of some of the game balls flowing down the second right side area during the specific game state is changed by the first flowing direction changing means to impart a game value. Not only is the direction changed to a direction in which the ball can be entered into the means, but also the direction in which the ball is difficult to enter into the specific ball entry means is changed by the second flow direction changing means. Therefore, as the number of game balls whose flowing direction is changed to a direction other than the specific ball-entering means increases, it becomes more difficult to enter the specific ball-entering means. can do.

(F4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (F1) to (F3),
The first right area is not provided with game nails that affect the direction in which game balls flow down the first right area, but the second right area is a game that flows down the second right area. A game machine characterized by not changing the flowing direction in which a game nail that affects the flowing direction of a ball is arranged.

According to the gaming machine described in (F4) above, since the flowing direction of the game ball flowing down the first right side area is not changed during the specific game state, when the game ball is shot aiming at the first right side area, Compared to the case where the game ball is shot aiming at the second right area, the time until the predetermined number of round games is completed is shortened. Therefore, it is possible to differentiate the time until the predetermined number of round games are completed depending on whether the game is played in the first right area or the second right area during the specific game state.

(F5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (F1) to (F4),
Said second flow direction changing means changes the ratio of game balls entering said specific ball entering means among game balls flowing down said second right side area during said specific game state to said second flow direction change means during said specific game state 1. A gaming machine characterized by approximating the proportion of game balls entering the specific ball entering means among game balls flowing down the right side area.

In the gaming machine described in (F5) above, the ratio of game balls entering the specific ball entry means among the game balls flowing down the second right side area during the specific game state is specified by the second flow direction changing means. Since the ratio of the game balls that enter the specific ball entry means to the game balls flowing down the first right side area during the game state is approximated, the player can aim at either the first right side area or the second right side area. It is difficult to give unforeseen disadvantages to

(F6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (F1) to (F4),
Said second flow direction changing means changes the ratio of game balls entering said specific ball entering means among game balls flowing down said second right side area during said specific game state to said second flow direction change means during said specific game state 1. A gaming machine characterized in that the percentage of game balls entering the specific ball entering means among the game balls flowing down the right side area is set lower than that of the game balls.

In the gaming machine described in (F6) above, the ratio of game balls entering the specific ball entering means among the game balls flowing down the second right side area during the specific game state is specified by the second flow direction changing means. The first right area in which stable ball entry to the specific ball entering means can be expected because the ratio of the game balls entering the specific ball entering means among the game balls flowing down the first right area during the game state is lower than that of the game balls. Rather, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to play to obtain a predetermined game value by shooting a game ball into the second game area and entering or passing through the game value giving means.

(F7) In the gaming machine described in (F6) above,
The game value is a prize ball paid out to the player in one specific game state,
a first number of profit balls obtained by subtracting the number of game balls shot by the game balls from the number of prize balls that the player receives when the game balls are continuously shot to the first right area in one specific game state; , the second number of profit balls obtained by subtracting the number of game balls shot by the game balls from the number of prize balls that the player receives when the game balls are continuously shot to the second right area, A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine described in (F7) above, in one specific game state, when game balls are continuously shot to the first right side area, the game ball is shot from the number of prize balls that the player receives. A first profit ball number obtained by subtracting the number of balls, and a second number obtained by subtracting the number of game balls shot by the game balls from the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player if the player continues to shoot game balls into the second right area. Since the 2 number of profit balls is an approximate value, the number of profit balls that the player can obtain even if the player shoots the game ball to either the first right side area or the second right side area in one specific game state. It becomes difficult to differentiate between Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player receives an unexpected disadvantage.

(F8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (F1) to (F7),
The game machine, wherein the game value imparting means is arranged in the second right area.

According to the gaming machine described in (F8) above, since the game value imparting means is arranged in the second right side game, the motivation of the player to aim at the second right side area can be increased.

(F9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (F1) to (F7),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the gaming value imparting means is arranged at a position where a gaming ball that has been ejected from the second right side area and has not entered the specific gaming state can enter.

According to the gaming machine described in (F9) above, the game value imparting means is arranged at a position where the game ball discharged from the second right side area and not entering the specific ball entering means can enter. Therefore, the player's motivation can be maintained even when the game ball shot aiming at the second right area does not enter the specific ball entering means.

(F10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (F1) to (F7),
The game value imparting means is arranged in a third game area other than the second right area,
A gaming machine comprising guide means for guiding game balls flowing down the second right side area to the third game area.

According to the gaming machine described in (F10) above, since the game ball flowing down the second right side area is guided by the guide means to the third game area where the game value imparting means is disposed, the second right side area When aiming at the area, the game areas other than the second right side area can also be actively utilized.

(F11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (10),
A gaming machine, wherein the game value imparting means is prize winning means that allows the player to receive a payout of a predetermined number of prize balls when a game ball enters the game ball.

According to the gaming machine described in (F11) above, if game balls enter the winning means as the game value imparting means, the number of prize balls paid out to the player during the specific game state increases. 2. Motivation to shoot a game ball aiming at the right area can be increased.

(F12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (10) above,
The game value imparting means is a first start trigger generation means for generating a trigger for performing a lottery for determining whether or not to generate the specific result when the entry of a game ball satisfies the start condition. game machine.

According to the gaming machine described in (F12) above, when a game ball enters the first start opportunity generating means as the game value imparting means, an opportunity for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a specific result is generated. Therefore, the motivation to shoot the game ball aiming at the second right area can be increased.

(F13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (10) above,
It has an operating member that operates between an open state in which a game ball is likely to enter and a closed state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than in the open state, and when the entry of a game ball is considered to satisfy the start condition, the specified result is obtained. is provided with a second start opportunity generation means for generating an opportunity to perform a lottery as to whether to generate
The game value imparting means is a game ball passage detection means for performing a lottery as to whether or not the operating member moves between the open state and the closed state, triggered by the detection of the passage of the game ball. game machine.

According to the gaming machine described in (F13) above, if a game ball enters the second start opportunity generating means as the game value imparting means, whether or not the operation member operates to the open state and the closed state is performed, the motivation to shoot the game ball aiming at the second right area can be enhanced.

It should be noted that all the constituent elements of the various inventions disclosed in this specification can be combined in various ways, and that the invention can stand alone without other constituent requirements.

As described above, the present invention is suitable for game machines such as pachinko machines.

30 ... game board (game board)
30l... Left side game area 30l (first area)
30r1 ... First right game area (first right area, second area)
30r2 ... Second right side game area (second right side area, second area)
30d... Lower game area (third game area)
31 … General winning port (game value giving means, winning means)
32 ... Variable winning device 32 (specific ball winning means)
33a... First starting port (game value imparting means, first starting opportunity generating means)
33b .
34 through gate (game value imparting means, game ball passing detection means)
47 ... Center frame (first game part)
401 ... branch rail (second game component)
403... First flow direction changing unit (flow direction changing means, first flow direction changing unit)
405 ... second flow direction changing unit (flow direction changing means, second flow direction changing unit)

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that variably displays identification information due to the establishment of a starting condition, and shifts to a specific game state advantageous to a player when the variably displayed result becomes a predetermined specific display mode,
information output means for outputting auditory information that is audibly recognizable according to the progress of the game;
information output control means for controlling output of information by the information output means;
and an operation means for receiving an operation by a player,
The information output control means is
Specific information output control for controlling the output of specific auditory information having a plurality of levels at which the first recognizable time point can differ depending on the player within the specific information effect period during the variable display of the identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. have the means,
In the specific information rendering period, a validity period is set during which the operation of the operating means is valid while the specific auditory information is being output,
grasping means for grasping the level of the specific auditory information being output based on the operation of the operating means during the validity period;
a display control means for causing a display means to display information suggesting the level based on the grasped level ;
The specific auditory information can be output in stages from specific auditory information that is difficult for the player to recognize to specific auditory information that is easy for the player to recognize.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images